Volvo 2010 V50 Owner`s manual

Volvo 2010 V50 Owner`s manual
VOLVO V50
Owners Manual
WEB EDITION
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%-*':c\a^h]!6I%.'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%%.!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%.Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of
you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current
safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions
and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 01 02
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
Seatbelts...................................................
Airbag system...........................................
Airbags (SRS)............................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*.
Side airbags (SIPS bags)..........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................
WHIPS.......................................................
When the systems deploy.........................
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
02 Instruments and controls
16
19
20
23
25
27
28
30
31
32
Overview, left-hand drive cars..................
Overview, right-hand drive cars................
Driver's door control panel.......................
Combined instrument panel......................
Indicator and warning symbols.................
Information display...................................
Electrical socket........................................
Lighting panel...........................................
Left-hand stalk switch...............................
Right-hand stalk switch............................
Cruise control*..........................................
Keypad in the steering wheel*..................
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers................................................
Parking brake............................................
Power windows.........................................
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........
Power sunroof*.........................................
Personal preferences................................
42
44
46
47
48
52
54
55
58
61
64
66
67
68
69
71
75
77
HomeLinkŸ *.............................................. 79
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
03 04 05
03 Climate control
General information on climate control.....
Manual climate control, AC.......................
Electronic climate control, ECC*...............
Air distribution...........................................
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*....................
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel).........
04 Interior
84
86
89
92
93
96
Front seats..............................................
Interior lighting........................................
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment..................................................
Rear seat.................................................
Cargo area..............................................
05 Locks and alarm
100
102
104
108
110
Remote control key with key blade.........
Active locks.............................................
Keyless drive*..........................................
Battery in remote control key..................
Locking and unlocking............................
Child safety locks....................................
Alarm*.....................................................
116
119
120
123
124
127
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
06 07 08
4
06 Starting and driving
07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 134
Refuelling................................................ 136
Starting the engine.................................. 137
Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 139
Keyless drive*.......................................... 141
Manual gearbox...................................... 142
Automatic gearbox.................................. 144
All-wheel drive......................................... 148
Brake system.......................................... 149
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*......................................................... 151
Park Assist*............................................. 153
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 155
Towing and recovery.............................. 159
Start assistance...................................... 161
Driving with a trailer................................ 162
Towing equipment*................................. 164
Detachable towbar*................................ 166
Loading................................................... 170
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 171
General....................................................
Tyre pressure..........................................
Warning triangle* and spare wheel* .......
Changing wheels....................................
Emergency puncture repair*...................
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Car care
174
178
181
183
185
Cleaning.................................................. 192
Touching up paintwork........................... 195
Rustproofing........................................... 196
Table of contents
09 10 11
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service...........................................
Self-maintenance....................................
Bonnet and engine compartment...........
Oils and fluids.........................................
Wiper blades...........................................
Battery.....................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Fuses......................................................
10 Infotainment system
200
201
202
204
209
211
213
219
General....................................................
Audio functions.......................................
Radio functions.......................................
CD functions...........................................
Menu structure – audio system..............
Phone functions*.....................................
Menu structure – phone*.........................
Bluetooth handsfree*..............................
11 Specifications
228
230
234
239
242
243
250
253
Type designation.....................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Catalytic converter..................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
260
263
266
268
272
275
280
281
283
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Table of contents
12
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 284
6
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Option
Footnote
Introduction
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk .
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not present in all cars. In addition to
standard equipment, this manual also
describes options (factory fitted equipment)
and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment). If you are uncertain over what is
standard or option/accessory then we recommend that you contact your Volvo dealer.
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying requirements of different markets, as well as for
national or local legal requirements and regulations.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
© Volvo Car Corporation
8
The range of options/accessories for the different car models varies depending on the market. The majority of options are factory fitted
and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are retrofitted.
We recommend that you contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more information.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for example.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are highlighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Introduction
Important information
Warning for personal injury
Risk of property damage
Information
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
9
Introduction
Important information
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
•
10
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use
computers which check and share information
with each other on the car's function. One or
more of these computers may store information on the systems they check during normal
driving, during the course of a collision or nearcollision. Stored information may be used by:
•
•
•
•
Volvo Car Corporation
Service or repair workshops
Police or other authorities
Other parties who claim legal entitlement
for access to the information or someone
who has permission from the owner to
access the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. We
therefore recommend that you always contact
an authorised Volvo workshop before installing
accessories which are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most resourceefficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase in
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact, for example, by driving economically
and by servicing and maintaining the car
according to the instructions in the owner's
manual.
Decrease fuel consumption by choosing
ECO tyre pressure, see page 178.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption.
Remove them directly after use.
Volvo workshops and the environment
•
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
Remove unnecessary items from the car.
The greater the load the higher the fuel
consumption.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater, always use it before starting from
1
More information on www.oekotex.com
cold. This reduces fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions.
•
•
Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.
•
•
Use engine braking to slow down.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. We recommend that you consult an authorised
Volvo workshop for advice if you are uncertain about the disposal of this type of
waste.
•
•
Service your car regularly.
The following advice will help you to do your bit
for the environment: (for further advice on how
you can reduce environmental impact and
drive economically, see page 134).
•
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, carpets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
with plant substances and fulfils the certification requirements.
12
nance of your car it becomes part of our system. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Drive in the highest gear possible. Low
engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.
Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention
to local regulations. Switch off the engine
when stationary for longer periods.
High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance. A doubling of speed increases wind
resistance 4 times.
These hints will help reduce fuel consumption
without increasing travel time or lessening the
enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to
your car, you'll be saving money - and the
Earth's resources.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
The owner's manual and the
environment
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in
this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.
13
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
16
19
20
23
25
27
28
30
31
32
G020871
Seatbelts.................................................................................................
Airbag system.........................................................................................
Airbags (SRS)..........................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*...............................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)..............................................................................
WHIPS.....................................................................................................
When the systems deploy.......................................................................
Crash mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
SAFETY
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
General information
Releasing the seatbelt
±
Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
G020104
Keep in mind the following:
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be positioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
±
16
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
•
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
•
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
•
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
•
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt
has been subjected to a major load, such as
in conjunction with a collision, the entire
seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the
seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not
appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be
replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and designed for installation at
the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
Seatbelts and pregnancy
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message
is shown in the information display when
the seatbelts are used or the rear doors are
opened. The message is automatically
cleared after approx. 30 seconds or can be
acknowledged manually by pressing the
READ button.
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during a journey. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when
acknowledged manually by pressing the
READ button.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
G018084
G020105
Seatbelt reminder
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section of the seatbelt should wrap over the shoulder then be
routed between the breasts and to the side of
the abdomen. The lap section of the seatbelt
should lay flat over the thighs and as low as
possible under the abdomen. – It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits close to
the body. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
01
The message on the information display showing which seatbelts are in use is always available. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Certain markets
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first six seconds.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
``
17
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Seatbelt tensioner
The front seatbelts and the two for the outer
rear seats are equipped with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for occupants.
18
01 Safety
Airbag system
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
01
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the display in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT
appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
The airbag system1 is continually monitored by
the system's control module. The warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is turned
to position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after
approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system1 is working correctly.
1
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS and IC.
19
01 Safety
01
Airbags (SRS)
Airbag system
WARNING
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
G020111
20
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags is
deployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adapted to the collision force to which they are
subjected.
G020110
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver's side and
passenger side are used.
SRS system, right-hand drive
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS)
Do not put objects in front of or above the
instrument panel where the passenger airbag is located.
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System) to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
G020109
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive
and right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Passenger airbag (SRS)
G020108
G020113
Airbag (SRS) on the driver's side
01
The car has an airbag1 to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. This airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel
is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
1
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and back
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered.
``
21
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS)
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.2
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat. Children under
140 cm must never sit in the front passenger
seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the life of the child.
G032243
Label Airbag
Location of decal for front passenger airbag.
2
22
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*
General information
The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat
can be deactivated if the car is equipped with
a PACOS switch. For information on how to
activate/deactivate, see under the heading
Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open, (see under the heading,
Switch – PACOS). Check that the switch is in
the required position. Volvo recommends that
the key blade is used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 117.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag (SRS), but does not have a switch
(PACOS), the airbag will always be activated.
Activating/deactivating
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the text message in the roof
panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is
deactivated and if the warning symbol for
the airbag system is also displayed on the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
G019800
Key switch off - PACOS
01
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, children taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child who is shorter than
140 cm in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the
airbag is activated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information on the different ignition positions, see page 137.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Children taller than 140 cm must never sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
G018083
Messages
2
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS)
is activated.
G018082
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger
seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS)
is deactivated.
24
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
ignition position II or III the warning symbol
for the airbag is shown in the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see
page 19.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not place any objects in the area
between the outside of the seat and the
door panel, since this area is required
by the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
G020118
•
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front
seat backrests.
1
Location
G025315
Side airbag
01
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated1 passenger airbag.
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
``
25
01 Safety
01
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
G032246
G025316
Label, side airbag
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
26
Location of decal for side airbag, driver's side,
front, left-hand drive car.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
01
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
G019985
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
supplement to the SIPS and the airbags. It is
fitted in the headlining along both sides of the
roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in
the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision
trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is
inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent
the driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the side windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
27
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
G020347
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints for the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
28
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
WARNING
WARNING
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
01 Safety
WHIPS
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
01
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
G020125
G020126
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
Do not leave any objects on the rear seat.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat or the passenger seat.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
29
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
Activating the systems
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat
In a frontal collision
Airbags (SRS)
In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS)
In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC
In a side-impact accidentA
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end collision
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of
the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
30
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner systems are deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Crash mode
Driving after a collision
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then
reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL is still shown on the display then the
car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once moving.
G029042
Moving the car
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on
the information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
01
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is
displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that you have it
conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
can be moved carefully out of a dangerous
position. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
crash mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you always engage
an authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to NORMAL MODE after
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been
displayed.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
31
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Child seats
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can damage the straps.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size. For more information, see
page 34.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
NOTE
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Volvo recommends that
you use Volvo genuine equipment to best
ensure that the mounting points and attachments are correctly positioned and are sufficiently strong.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
1
2
32
G020128
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
Volvo has child safety products that are
designed for and tested by Volvo.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 23.
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated1.
•
a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat.
Always place a child in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A child in the front
passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated2.
Children shorter than 140 cm must never sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the life of the child.
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
01
Label Airbag
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label located on instrument panel end face.
``
33
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Recommended child seats3
Weight/age
Front seatA
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 0
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
Group 0+
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps. Use a protective cushion
between the child seat and the dashboard.
max. 13 kg
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture
system.
Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture
system.
Volvo infant seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Type approval: E1 03301146
Type approval: E1 03301146
Volvo infant seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Type approval: E1 03301146
max. 10 kg
(0 – 9 months)
3
34
With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight/age
Front seatA
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 1
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps. Use a protective cushion
between the child seat and the dashboard.
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
9 – 18 kg
(9 – 36 months)
01
Type approval: E5 03135
Group 2, 15-25 kg, 3-6 yr
Volvo turnable child seat – rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo turnable child seat – rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Type approval: E5 03171
Volvo turnable child seat - front-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo turnable child seat - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Volvo turnable child seat - frontfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
Volvo turnable child seat – rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo turnable child seat – rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
``
35
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Weight/age
Front seatA
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 2/3
Volvo Booster cushion – with or without backrest.
Volvo Booster cushion – with or without backrest.
Volvo Booster cushion – with or
without backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Type approval: E5 03139
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo booster cushion with backrest.
Volvo booster cushion with backrest.
Type approval: E1 04301198
Type approval: E1 04301198
Volvo booster cushion with backrest.
15 – 36 kg
(3 – 12 years)
Type approval: E1 04301198
Volvo Integrated booster cushion –
available as a factory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 03168
A
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated4.
Children shorter than 140 cm must never sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the life of the child.
4
36
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 23.
01 Safety
Child safety
Integrated booster cushions*
Check that:
G015013
G020808
Raising the booster cushion
Volvo’s integrated booster cushion for the
outer rear seats is specially designed to provide optimum safety for children. Combined
with the regular seatbelts the integrated
booster cushion is approved for children
weighing between 15 and 36 kg.
01
Pull that handle to raise the booster cushion.
Grasp the cushion with both hands and
push it backwards.
Push until it locks in place.
WARNING
The booster cushion must be in the locked
position before the child is placed there.
•
•
the booster cushion in locked in position
•
the hip strap is low across the hips for optimum protection
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
•
carefully adjust the position of the head
restraint to suit the child.
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted, and that
the seatbelt is positioned correctly across
the shoulder
WARNING
Repair or replacement should only be performed by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or
additions to the booster cushion yourself.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
37
01 Safety
01
Child safety
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*
Pull the handle.
Lower the seat and press until it locks.
NOTE
Remember to stow away the booster cushion before lowering the rear seat backrest.
G015268
G014507
Lowering the booster cushion
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see
illustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
38
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01 Safety
01
39
42
44
46
47
48
52
54
55
58
61
64
66
67
68
69
71
75
77
HomeLinkŸ *............................................................................................ 79
40
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020901
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................
Overview, right-hand drive cars..............................................................
Driver's door control panel.....................................................................
Combined instrument panel....................................................................
Indicator and warning symbols...............................................................
Information display..................................................................................
Electrical socket......................................................................................
Lighting panel..........................................................................................
Left-hand stalk switch.............................................................................
Right-hand stalk switch..........................................................................
Cruise control*........................................................................................
Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers.............................
Parking brake..........................................................................................
Power windows.......................................................................................
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......................................................
Power sunroof*.......................................................................................
Personal preferences..............................................................................
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
G019488
02
42
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
Steering wheel adjustment
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Bonnet release
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator
Control panel
Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Door handle, lock button.
Interior rearview mirror
Display for climate control and infotainment system
Infotainment system
Air vents in dashboard
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Air vent for side window
Climate control
Cruise control
Gear lever
Horn, airbag
Hazard warning flashers
Combined instrument panel
Door handle
Keypad for infotainment system
Glovebox
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp
washers
Parking brake
Ignition switch
Sunroof controls
02
Electrical socket/cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
No function
No function
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
43
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
G028204
02
44
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
No function
Switch, optional equipment
No function
Parking brake
Sunroof controls
Control panel
Ignition switch
Glovebox
Windscreen wipers and washers, headlamp washers
Door handle
Air vent for side window
Air vents in dashboard
Gear lever
Climate control
02
Cruise control
Combined instrument panel
Horn, airbag
Keypad for infotainment system
Hazard warning flashers
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Door handle, lock button
Infotainment system
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Display for climate control and infotainment system
Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer
Interior rearview mirror
Bonnet release
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator
Steering wheel adjustment
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
45
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
Driver's door control panel
G017435
02
Disengaging the rear power windows.
Electric child safety lock*
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
46
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
G029046
02
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display – Shows information or
warning messages, outside temperature
and clock. When the outside temperature
is between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illuminates on the display. This warns of icy
roads. The outside temperature gauge
may show a slightly high reading after the
car has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Tachometer – Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer,
page 59.
Main beam indicator.
Display – Display for automatic gear position, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and
cruise control.
Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and
gear positions in the 1.6D DRIVe model,
see page 142.
Button for trip meter – Used to measure
short distances. Short presses on the button switches between the two trip meters
T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the engine
cooling system. A message will appear on
the display if the temperature becomes too
high and the gauge goes into the red zone.
Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front
of the air intake, for example, reduce the
cooling capacity at high outside temperatures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
Direction indicator, right.
47
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check, symbols
02
All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate
when the remote control key is turned to position II before starting. This is to check that the
symbols are working. When the engine starts,
all the symbols should go out except the handbrake symbol, which only goes out when the
brake is disengaged.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument
panel
G030755
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with
the READ button, see page 52. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
48
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using READ.
If the engine does not start within
five seconds, all symbols extinguish except the symbols for a
fault in the car's emissions system
and for low oil pressure. Certain
symbols may have no function,
depending on the car's specifications.
1
When the symbol illuminates:
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 52.
The yellow information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the
information display. The message
text is cleared using the READ button, see page 52, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator symbols – left-hand side
Emissions system
Stability system STC or DSTC*
If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection.
G029048
ABS fault
Fault in car's emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system STC or DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
For information on the system's
functions and symbols, see
page 151.
02
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during
engine preheating. Preheating
occurs when the temperature is
below -2 °C. The car can be started
once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the
level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible.
3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked if the symbol remains lit.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear fog
lamp is on.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator symbols – right-hand side
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used and
the trailer is connected. If the symbol does not flash then one of the
lamps on the trailer or the car is
02
faulty.
Parking brake applied
G029049
The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is applied. Always
pull the parking brake lever to the
end position.
Indicator symbol for trailer
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how
hard the parking brake is applied.
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
2
50
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or
IC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop
for inspection.
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 52.
Low oil pressure2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone
in a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates while
driving, a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
±
Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 208. If the reservoir level is below
MIN then the car should not be driven further. Volvo recommends that the car is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols
illuminate at the same time, there
may be a fault in the brake force
distribution system.
have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from
an authorised Volvo workshop.
6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any further. Have the car transported to a workshop to have the brake system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end
will skid during heavy braking.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgate
is not properly closed, the driver will be
reminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed less
than 5 km/h, the information symbol illuminates and DRIVER
DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN,LEFT REAR
DOOR OPEN, BONNET OPEN or RIGHT
REAR DOOR OPEN is shown on the display.
Stop the car safely as soon as possible and
close the door or bonnet.
02
High speed
If the car is moving faster than
10 km/h, the symbol illuminates
and one of the texts indicated in
the preceding paragraph appears
on the display.
Tailgate reminder
If the tailgate is open, this information symbol will illuminate and
TAILGATE OPEN will appear on
the display.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 208.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can be
driven, with great care, to a workshop to
3
Only cars with alarm.
51
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Messages
G029050
02
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates
the information display shows a supplementary message.
±
Specification
Message
Specification
STOP SAFELYA
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE
SERVICE
URGENTA
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car
immediately.
SEE MANUALA
Read the Owner's
Manual.
Time for regular
service. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service. The
timing is determined
by the number of kilometres driven,
number of months
since the last service, engine running
time and oil grade.
SERVICE
REQUIREDA
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
SERVICE OVERDUE
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
If the service intervals are not followed
then the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out the service.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regular
service. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEEDED
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ button. Fault messages are stored in the memory
until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
52
Message
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level.
The message is
shown every
10000 km (certain
engine variants). For
information on
checking the oil
level, see page 205.
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until
the message clears,
see page 146.
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothly
or stop the car in a
safe manner. Disengage the gear and
run the engine at
idling speed until the
message clears. For
more information,
see page 146.
TRANSM OIL
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stop
the car immediately
in a safe manner.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop is
contacted.B
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER
MANUAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regeneration, see page 278.
STC/DSTC SPIN
CONTROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 152 for more
variants.
If shown repeatedly
then Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
A
B
02
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 146.
53
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
12 V electrical socket
Electrical socket in the rear seat
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
G019621
G029082
02
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For
the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Cigarette lighter*
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
54
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers.
NOTE
Cigarette lighter does not work in this
socket.
It is designed for 12 V. The maximum current
is 10 A. For the socket to supply current, the
remote control key must be in at least position
I.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
General
Position
Position/parking lamps
Specification
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of remote control key position.
Automatic/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
G020139
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Front fog lamps*
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
±
02
Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre
position.
When the remote control key is in position II the
position/parking lamps and number plate lighting are always on.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the
end positions.
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively
to raise or lower beam alignment.
Cars with Dual Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no control
(1).
Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position II,
except when the headlamp control (2) is in the
centre position. If necessary, the automatic
dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that this is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 58.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Fog lamps
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from
country to country.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the remote control key is in position II and the
headlamp control (2) is in one of the end positions. The lighting is automatically dimmed
during the day and can be controlled manually
at night.
±
Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter
or dimmer lighting.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when
the car is unlocked, see page 124.
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
Front fog lamps*
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with the headlamps or the position lamps/parking lamps.
±
Press the button (4).
The light in the button (4) illuminates when the
front fog lamps are switched on.
Enhanced display lighting
Rear fog lamp
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,
clock and outside temperature gauge, these
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when
the remote control key is removed from the
ignition switch. The displays extinguish when
the car is locked.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with
the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
±
Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
G026507
02
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position I or
0.
Lighting panel, for Active Bending Lights (ABL).
If the car is equipped with active headlamps
(Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light from the
headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in
bends and junctions and so provide increased
safety.
The LED
illuminates when the function
is activated. The LED flashes and an error message is shown on the information display in the
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
event of a malfunction. The function is only
active in twilight or darkness and only when the
car is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated with
the headlamp control.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
02
Emergency brake light and automatic
hazard warning flashers*
G020789
Emergency brake lights (Adaptive Brake
Lights) are activated in the event of sudden
braking or if the ABS brakes are activated. This
function means that the brake light flashes to
immediately alert cars travelling behind.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
The system is activated if ABS is used for more
than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy braking, however, only when braking from speeds
above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is
lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine normally again and the hazard warning flashers
are switched on automatically. The hazard
warning flashers remain on until the car accelerates again but can be deactivated with the
button for hazard warning flashers, see
page 67.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
Stalk switch positions
Direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence
02
±
2
Move the stalk switch up or down to
end position (2).
The stalk switch remains in its end position and
is moved back manually, or automatically by
steering wheel movement.
1
4
3
2
G026380
1
Short flash sequence, direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence, direction indicators
Main beam flash and switching from main
to dipped beam
Home safe lighting and switching from
dipped to main beam
Switching, main and dipped beam
The remote control key must be in position II
and the headlamp control in end position, see
page 55, for main beam to be switched on.
Activating main beam:
±
Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
Short flash sequence
Deactivating main beam:
±
±
Move the stalk switch up or down to
position (1) and release.
The direction indicators flash three times and
the stalk switch returns to its home position.
Main beam flash
±
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (3).
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released. Main beam flash only works when the
remote control key is inserted in the ignition
switch.
Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to position (3) and release.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90
seconds, see page 78.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1
58
Factory settings.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
Trip computer*
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by
pressing the READ button and revert to the
trip computer function.
Functions
G029052
The trip computer displays the following information:
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel2
- browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET2 - resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer information
turn the thumbwheel either up or down in
steps. Continue turning to return to the starting
point.
•
•
•
•
•
•
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration3 fuel consumption may increase, see page 278.
02
AVERAGE
The average fuel consumption is stored when
the ignition is switched off and remains until the
function is reset. Reset using the RESET button.
NOTE
AVERAGE SPEED
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater is used.
ACTUAL SPEED MPH*
INSTANTANEOUS
AVERAGE
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
The range to empty is calculated based on the
average fuel consumption over the last 30 km.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "--- km to empty tank". Refuel as soon
as possible.
STC/DSTC, see page 151
AVERAGE SPEED
When the ignition is switched off, the average
speed is stored and used as the basis of the
new value when you continue driving. Reset
using the RESET button.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
fuel consumption is changed due to a
change in driving style or if a fuel-driven
heater is used for example.
ACTUAL SPEED MPH
Current speed is displayed in mph.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
2
3
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
Resetting
1. Select AVERAGE SPEED or AVERAGE
2. Reset with one press on the RESET button. Press and hold the RESET button for
at least five seconds to reset the average
speed and average consumption at the
same time.
60
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
B
D
C
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers. The wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
02
0
High-pressure headlamp washing*
Intermittent wiping
A
You can adjust and set a suitable
speed for intermittent wiping. Turn
the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter
interval between sweeps. Turn it
down to increase the delay.
G025411
0
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Rear window wiper and washer
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on lighting panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time the
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash
cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer
interval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with the
switch on the lighting panel:
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter –
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
•
Dual Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
•
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position
0:
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
•
Dual Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
•
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
Rear window wiper and washer
02
wiping. If the rear window wiper is already on
at normal speed, no change is made.
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards).
The function for intermittent wiping for reverse
can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
On/Off
Rain sensor*
0
When activating the rain sensor, the remote
control key must be in position I or II and the
windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 (not activated).
Activating the rain sensor:
G021418
±
Press the button (B), see page 61. A display
symbol shows that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press button (B)
Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the
button.
Neutral position: Function deactivated.
Constant speed: Depress the bottom of
the button.
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
62
G029053
Move the stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping. The wiper blade
makes several extra sweeps once washing has
finished. The button at the end of the stalk
switch has three positions:
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel (C), see page 61.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sensitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Press the stalk switch downward to
another wiper program. If the stalk switch
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,
the wipers make an extra sweep and then
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk
is released to position 0 (not activated), see
page 61.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the ignition is switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the
rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while
the remote control key is in position I or II.
Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could
start swiping and become damaged.
02
Thumbwheel
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of
wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain
sensor is selected.
63
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
Activating
Increasing or decreasing speed
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than
one minute) using the accelerator, such as
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise
control setting. When you release the accelerator, the car will return to the programmed
speed.
02
Temporary disengagement
G020141
G029054
±
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
±
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
– changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.
2. Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
1
64
Increase or decrease the speed by pressing and holding + or –. The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
Depending on engine type.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control
temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the
combined instrument panel. The speed set
earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disengaged when:
•
the brake pedal or clutch pedal is
depressed
•
speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when travelling uphill
•
•
•
the gear selector is moved to position N
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
a temporary increase in speed lasts longer
than one minute.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
Return to the set speed
– Press this button to resume the
previously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combined
instrument panel.
02
Disengaging
±
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise
control. CRUISE ON clears on the combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
Button functions
G020142
02
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering
wheel keypad control the radio and the phone.
The function of a button depends on which
system is active. The steering wheel keypad
can be used to scroll between preset stations,
change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
±
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to
fast forward/reverse or search for the next
station.
The phone must be switched on to adjust audio
system settings. It must be activated with the
ENTER key to enable control of the phone system with the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
Steering wheel adjustment
WARNING
NOTE
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,
never while driving. Before driving, check
that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Regulations regarding the use of hazard
warning flashers vary from country to country.
02
G020143
Hazard warning flashers
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
G020144
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach.
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking
activates the hazard warning flashers automatically, see page 57. The function can be deactivated with the button.
67
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
Parking brake (handbrake)
How to Apply the parking brake
1. Fully depress the foot brake pedal.
02
2. Pull the lever firmly.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake
lever must be pulled more firmly.
When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in position 1 (for manual transmission)
or P (for automatic transmission)
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
The lever is located between the front seats.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates irrespective of
how hard the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Make sure that children, other passengers
or objects are not in danger of becoming
trapped in any way when the parking brake
is applied or released by the driver.
68
If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the
wheels toward the kerb.
How to release the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the button, release the parking brake
lever and release the button.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Operation
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The ignition key must be
in position I or II for the power windows to
operate.
The windows continue to work for a limited
amount of time when the car is stopped and
after the remote control key is removed, provided none of the doors is opened. Operate the
windows with caution.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passengers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows. Pay close attention if
the rear door windows are controlled from
the driver's door or if the windows are
closed with the remote control.
Driver's door
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
±
02
Manual operation
Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently or
raise it gently. The power window opens or
closes as long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation
To open a window:
±
The windows can be opened and closed in two
ways:
Fully depress one of the controls (2) or raise it,
then release. The side window will then open
or close automatically. If the window is
obstructed by an object, the movement will
stop.
WARNING
Raise the front of the control.
The function that interrupts the movement
of the windows in the event of them being
blocked works with both automatic and
manual closing, although not with pinch
protection deployed.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
Remote control and lock buttons
To operate the power windows with lock buttons and remote control, see pages 116 and
124.
If there are children in the car:
Controls, power windows.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
The driver can operate all of the power windows from the driver's seat.
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passengers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows.
``
69
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
Blocking power windows in the rear
doors
Rear power windows
NOTE
If the car has electric child safety locks on
the rear doors, the light indicates that these
are also activated. The doors then cannot
be opened from the inside. A text message
is shown on the display when the electric
child safety locks are activated.
G017440
G028208
Front passenger seat
Blocking rear power windows and electric child
safety locks*.
The light in the switch is lit
G019511
The rear door windows can only be operated
from the driver's door.
The light in the switch is extinguished
The rear door windows can be operated both
with the control on each rear door and with the
controls on the driver's door.
70
Front passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door operates that window only.
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each door or with the switch on
the driver's door. If the light in the switch for
blocking the rear power windows (located in
the control panel in the driver's door) is lit, the
rear door windows can only be operated from
the driver's door. The windows in the rear
doors are operated in the same way as the
windows in the front doors.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Interior rearview mirror with
compass.*
Calibrating the compass
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Dimming
Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)
is not available in mirrors with automatic dimming.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
G031045
02
G031043
Interior rearview mirror
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 seconds. Following which, the character C is
shown (the button is concealed so use a
paper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic
zone is shown.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the
number for the required magnetic zone (1–
15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic
zones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display resumes showing the
character C.
G020151
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete.
G020154
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G020152
G020150
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G020153
6. Following which, press and hold the button
in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand
drive cars and R for right-hand drive.
Magnetic zones, Europe.
Magnetic zones, South America.
72
Magnetic zones, Africa.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Door mirrors
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in
ignition position I and II.
Retracting the mirrors
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
G018252
WARNING
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
02
If the car is locked with the remote control
and is then started, the door mirrors will still
be extended.
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The
rearview mirrors can be operated in ignition
position I and II.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended automatically during unlocking if they were
retracted using the controls in the door.
Both door mirrors are the wide angled type
to provide optimal vision. Objects may
appear further away than they actually are.
Folding out the mirrors
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retracting/extending
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or using the Keyless system,
see page 120, the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings… Mirror fold on
locking, see page 78 for a description of the
menu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset to the neutral
position for electric retracting and extending to
work.
1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mirrors.
2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R
button. The mirrors are now reset to the
neutral.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light* in the door mirrors illuminates when
the approach lighting or home safe lighting is
activated.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*
02
BLIS is an information system that under certain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direction in the so-called "blind spot", see
page 155.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The front side windows are treated
with a coating which improves the view
in poor weather conditions. For information on
maintenance, see page 193.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. The water and dirt-repellent coating could be damaged.
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
Open positions
Ventilation position
WARNING
Open:
If there are children in the car:
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof
by removing the remote control key if the
driver leaves the car.
±
Press the rear edge of the control (5)
upward.
02
Close:
±
Pull the rear edge of the control (6) downward.
From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:
G007503
±
Sliding position
Automatic operation
±
G029222
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened in two positions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge
Sliding position, backwards/forwards
The remote control key must be in position I or
II.
Pull the control rearward to the end position (1) and release.
Pull the control past the point of resistance
(2) to the rear end position (1) or past the
point of resistance (3) to the forward end
position (4) and release. The sunroof
opens/closes completely.
Manual operation
Opening, automatic
Open:
Opening, manual
±
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
Pull the control rearward to the point of
resistance (2). The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button
is kept depressed.
Close:
±
Press the control forward to the point of
resistance (3). The sunroof moves to
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
closed position as long as the button is
kept depressed.
02
If you need to interrupt closing:
±
Press the lock button again.
WARNING
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual closing.
Closing with remote control or lock
button
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the sunroof with the
remote control. Always operate the sunroof
with caution.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
G020157
The sunroof's pinch protection function is activated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If
blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position.
±
76
One long press on the lock button closes
the sunroof and all the windows. The doors
and the tailgate are locked.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function only
operates during automatic closing, not during manual closing.
Make sure that nobody is in danger of
becoming trapped in any way when closing
the sunroof.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
Possible settings
Display
Clock, adjustment
Personal preferences can be set for some of
the car's functions. This applies to locks, climate control and audio functions. For audio
functions, see page 230.
MENU
The hour and minute are each adjusted separately.
EXIT
ENTER
Control panel
Navigation
Use
The settings are shown on the display (A).
Open the menu to enter settings:
A
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow
up" or "arrow down" on the navigation button (E).
2. Select the number for adjustment using
"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the navigation button.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
1. Press MENU (B).
NOTE
2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with
the navigation button (E).
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM
is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow
down" after the final minute number has
been adjusted.
3. Press ENTER (D).
E
B
4. Select an alternative with the navigation
button (E).
D
C
5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Close the menu:
G026307
±
Control panel.
Press EXIT (C) for approximately one second.
02
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in
cars equipped with ECC:
±
Select from Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer
When the timer is active, the air recirculates for
3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air
temperature.
``
77
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
±
02
Select On/Off depending on whether or
not you wish the recirculation timer to be
active.
Reset all
Resets the climate function options to the factory settings.
Doors – auto lock
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate can be locked automatically.
The On/Off options are available. Pulling the
door handle twice unlocks and opens the
doors from the inside.
Doors unlock
Car settings
Retract mirrors when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control the door mirrors can be retracted/extended automatically. The On/Off
options are available.
Reduced guard*
The deadlocks function can be temporarily
deactivated and the alarm level reduced if
someone wishes to remain in the car and the
doors have to be locked from the outside. The
Activate once and Ask on exit options are
available, see pages 125 and 129.
Unlock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feedback when the car is unlocked with the remote
control. The On/Off options are available.
Lock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feedback when the car is locked with the remote
control. The On/Off options are available.
78
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
• All doors – one press of the remote control
unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
• Driver's door first, then all others – one
press of the remote control unlocks the
driver's door. A second press then unlocks
all doors and the tailgate.
Keyless entry*
• All doors - all doors are unlocked simultaneously.
• Doors on same side – front and rear
doors on the same side are unlocked
simultaneously.
• Both front doors – both front doors are
unlocked simultaneously.
• Either front door – any door or the tailgate
can be unlocked separately.
Simultaneous closing/opening of all
windows
This function can be selected for the lock button on the remote control and the front doors'
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
central locking button, as well as the outside
door handle button on cars with the keyless
system:
• Auto. close all windows - all windows
and the sunroof are closed simultaneously
with one long press on the lock button.
This function can be selected for the unlock
button on the remote control and the front
doors' central locking button:
• Auto. open all windows – all windows are
opened simultaneously with one long
press on the unlock button.
Approach lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the approach lighting button is
pressed. The following alternatives are available: 30/60/90 seconds.
Home safe lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled
back after the remote control key has been
removed. The following alternatives are available: 30/60/90 seconds.
Information
• VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity number.
• Number of keys - The number of keys
registered for the car is shown.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
General
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLinkŸ.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if
the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. for purchasing a new
car).
Erase the programming for the buttons
when selling the car.
G030070
Metallic sun visors should not be used in
cars equipped with HomeLink. This could
have a negative effect on the HomeLink
function.
HomeLinkŸ is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLinkŸ panel consists of three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp.
Operation
When HomeLinkŸ is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate
the garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator lamp illuminates for the time that the button is kept depressed.
NOTE
In the event that the ignition is not activated,
HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the
driver's door has been opened.
02
WARNING
If HomeLinkŸ is used to operate a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the door or gate while it is in
motion.
Do not use the HomeLinkŸ remote control
for any garage door that does not have
safety stop and safety reverse. The garage
door must react immediately when it
detects that something is preventing its
movement, and stop directly and reverse. A
garage door without these characteristics
could cause personal injury. For further
information - contact the supplier via the
Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in
HomeLinkŸ and must not be carried out when
only one individual button is being reprogrammed.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flashing indicates that HomeLinkŸ is set in
"learn mode" and is ready to be programmed.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
02
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLinkŸ depends on the programming
of the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different distances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This process is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "rolling code". The garage door, gate or similar is not activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLinkŸ simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flashing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
5. Locate the "programming button1" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLinkŸ and
watching the indicator lamp:
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
•
1
80
•
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLinkŸ. Monitor the indicator lamp.
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLinkŸ button is depressed.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLinkŸ, while the "programming button" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on
HomeLinkŸ and do not release until step 3
has been completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkŸ
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLinkŸ. Monitor the indicator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different distances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
•
•
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLinkŸ button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This process is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "rolling code". The garage door, gate or similar is not activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLinkŸ, while the "programming button" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
02
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual
buttons.
±
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
> HomeLinkŸ is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be programmed once more, see page 79.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
84
86
89
92
93
96
G020906
General information on climate control...................................................
Manual climate control, AC.....................................................................
Electronic climate control, ECC*.............................................................
Air distribution.........................................................................................
Fuel-driven engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*.....................................................
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel).......................................................
CLIMATE CONTROL
03
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
Air conditioning
Fault tracing and repair
Display
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with either
manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,
Electronic Climate Control).
Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault
tracing and repair of the climate control system
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
There is a display above the climate control
panel. This displays climate control settings.
03
NOTE
The air conditioning system can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
air in the passenger compartment and prevent the windows from misting, it should
always be on.
Personal preferences
Refrigerant
The air conditioning system contains R134a
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlorine, which means that it is harmless to the
ozone layer. The system must only be charged
with R134a refrigerant, see also page 272.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop carries out this work.
Misting windows
Passenger compartment filter
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by first using the defroster function.
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is only cleaned with one filter. This must
be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the
Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment,
it may be necessary to replace the filter more
often.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the windows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the
windscreen).
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
84
You can set preferences for two climate control
functions:
•
Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to
cars with ECC).
•
Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air.
For information about these settings, see
page 77.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
Air vents in the dashboard
ECC*
Side windows and sunroof
Actual temperature
To ensure that the air conditioning works satisfactorily, close all side windows and the sunroof (if fitted).
G019942
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects the side from which the sun is shining
into the passenger compartment. This means
that the temperature can differ between the
right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off temporarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
03
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Sensor location
Open
Closed
•
The sun sensor is on the top side of the
dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is behind the climate control
panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor is located in the interior rearview mirror.
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows
to remove misting from the front side windows.
During cold weather - Close the centre vents
for optimum comfort and best demisting.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
Control panel
2
8
3
4
1
9
03
4
7
6
Fan
Functions
2. Recirculation
Recirculation
1. Fan
Recirculation can be used to
shut out bad air, exhaust
fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated. No outside air
is taken into the car. Recirculation (together with the air conditioning system) cools the passenger compartment more
quickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recirculates for too long then there is a risk of the
windows misting.
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature
86
G026308
5
Increase or decrease the fan
speed by turning the knob.
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in
the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the fan symbol
and OFF.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
Timer
4. Air distribution
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
See page 77, for activating/deactivating the
function. When the Defroster (3) program is
selected, recirculation is deactivated.
3. Defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
A symbol on the display
above the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
Refer to the table on page 92.
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (5))
•
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
03
Higher heat:
±
Press the button once – both lights illuminate.
Lower heat:
5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
6. and 7. Heated front seats*
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
OFF: The air conditioning is
off.
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button). An illuminated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in
the button shows the function selected.
±
Press the button twice – one light illuminates.
Heat off:
±
Press the button three times – light not illuminated.
8. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mirrors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear window and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or automatically. Switch off manually with one press
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
on the button. Automatic switching off disconnects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside temperature.
03
During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
9. Temperature
Select cooling or heating for
both driver and passenger
side.
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
Control panel
2
3
9
4
5
1
10
03
5
8
7
AUTO
Functions
Fan
1. AUTO
G026309
6
2. Fan
The AUTO function automatically regulates climate control and maintains the
selected temperature. The
AUTO function controls heating, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation, and air
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
distribution.
Heated front right seat
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are switched off
when AUTO is switched on. The display shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the
fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are switched off.
The display shows the fan symbol and
OFF.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
3. Recirculation
03
The function is selected to
shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated, i.e. no outside
air is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the car
recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
To activate/deactivate the function see
page 77.
NOTE
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
3. Air quality system*
Same button as recirculation.
The air quality system consists of a multi-filter
and a sensor. The filter separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. When
the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air
intakes are closed and the air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated. A green light (A)
illuminates in the button when the air quality
sensor is active.
±
Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality
sensor (normal setting).
Or:
±
Switch between three functions by pressing repeatedly the recirculation button.
•
Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)
illuminates.
•
•
G000000
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (6))
No recirculation engaged, provided it is not
required for cooling in hot weather – light
not illuminated.
•
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illuminates.
5. Air distribution
•
As a rule, the air quality sensor should
always be engaged.
•
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The defroster functions for the front, side
and rear windows can be used to demist
the windows.
4. Defroster
Activating the air quality sensor:
Keep the following in mind:
90
•
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
A symbol on the display above the climate control panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
7 and 8. Heated front seats*
To activate front seat heating:
Refer to the table on page 92.
6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button).
Higher heat:
±
Lower heat:
±
The climate control system's demisting
function with humidity sensor is significantly
reduced with the air conditioning in deactivated mode (OFF), as well as with manually
selected air distribution and fan speed.
During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
Press the button three times – light not illuminated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mirrors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear window and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or automatically. Switch off manually with one press
03
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Press the button twice - one light illuminates.
Heat off:
±
NOTE
Press the button once – both lights illuminate.
on the button. Automatic switching off disconnects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside temperature.
Press the button once to activate one side only. Press
again to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activate
both sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's light
and in the display above the climate control
panel.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
92
Air distribution
Use:
Air distribution
Use:
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents. The
air is not recirculated. Air
conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting
and icing in a cold and
humid climate. (Not
for low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.
to warm the feet.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.
to provide cooler air for
the feet or warmer air
to the upper body in
cold weather or hot,
dry weather.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
General information about heaters
Refuelling
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display.
The parking heater heats the engine and passenger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
±
WARNING
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
03
IMPORTANT
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –10 °C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
The car must be outdoors when the petrol
or diesel heater is used.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk READ button once.
G007632
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the
parking heater is switched off. When it is
running, the information display shows
PARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Activating the heater
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
DIRECT START is activated, the
information symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates
and the information display shows
an explanatory text.
G029052
03
Display
Specification
FUEL HEATER ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that the
heater will start at
the set time after the
car has been left,
when the remote
control key is
removed from the
ignition switch.
READ button
Thumbwheel1
RESETbutton1
Display
Specification
HEATER STOPPED - LOW BATTERY
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine.
HEATER STOPPED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine as well as
50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT
START.
2. Press the RESET button to select between
ON and OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
With the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.
1
94
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK
HEAT TIMER 1.
2. Briefly press the RESET button so that the
hours setting starts to flash.
3. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can
be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with
the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
TIMER 1.
03
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:
1. Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2.
The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing minutes setting.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop".
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
Clock/timer
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may
be required for achieving the correct temperature in the engine and passenger compartment
during cold weather.
03
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on
or off manually but is only controlled by the
car's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
03
97
98
100
102
104
108
110
G020908
Front seats............................................................................................
Interior lighting......................................................................................
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment...................................
Rear seat...............................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
INTERIOR
04
04 Interior
Front seats
Seating position
Lumbar support1 (driver's and passenger
seat*), turn the wheel.
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
Control panel for power seat*.
2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position
90 degrees.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat and
adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before setting off, never while driving.
04
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
while folding it forwards.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
Floor mats*
Tipping the front seat backrest*
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
changing the position setting.
Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion
(driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/
down.
Raise/lower the seat (driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/down.
1
100
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo supplies floor carpets which are especially produced for your car.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment
clips to prevent it from being trapped
around and under the pedals.
04 Interior
Front seats
Power seat*
the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings
can be adjusted at a time.
Memory function
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the function.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do
not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of,
behind or under the seat during adjustment.
G020199
Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Memory in remote control key
G020200
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key being inserted into the
ignition switch. The seat can always be
adjusted in ignition position I or II.
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust seat.
Seat, forwards/backwards
2. Press and hold button M while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Seat, up/down
Using a stored setting
Backrest rake
Press one of the memory buttons 1–3 until the
seat stops. If you release the button then the
movement of the seat will stop.
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
04
The settings for the driver's seat are stored in
the memory for the remote control key with
which the car is locked. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key the
driver's seat adopts the stored settings when
the driver's door is opened.
NOTE
The remote control key memory is independent of seat memory.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
04 Interior
Interior lighting
Reading lamps and interior lighting
Vanity mirror*
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Rear roof lighting
G020210
G020201
04
G030855
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
The lamp is automatically switched on and off
respectively when the cover is opened or
closed.
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in ignition position I and II as
well as when the engine is running. The lighting
can also be activated within 30 minutes after:
102
•
the engine has been switched off and the
ignition is in position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Reading lamps, rear.
Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off
Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
the relevant button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
Cargo area lighting
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 102, three positions can be selected for the lighting the passenger compartment:
•
Off – right-hand side (marked with 0)
depressed, automatic lighting switched
off.
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting activated. The dimmer function is active.
•
On – left-hand side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
•
•
the engine is started
the car is locked with the key or remote
control key.
Passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors
is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after 5 minutes.
04
Neutral position
When the switch (2) is in neutral position passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
below.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade.
•
the engine is stopped and the remote control key is turned to position 0.
103
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
04
104
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage pocket on rear of front seats.
Glovebox
Coat hanger
Storage compartment in door panel with
cup holder.
Ticket clip
Storage pocket on front edge of front seat
cushions.
Glovebox
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs
and cup holder, *) and storage compartment behind the centre console.
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Storage compartment and cup holder.
Storage pocket* on front edge of centre
rear seat cushion.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects
lie or protrude in such a way that they could
cause injury during heavy braking.
G024208
Bottle holder*
04
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
coins, pens and fuel cards.
The coat hanger is located on the passenger
seat head restraint. Only hang light garments
on the hanger.
The glovebox can be locked with the remote
control key's detachable key blade. Further
information is available on page 117.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage under the front armrest
Cup holder in centre console
There is a storage space under the armrest.
There is also a smaller storage space in the
detachable armrest. Press the small button
and lift the armrest to open the shallow compartment. Press the large button and lift the
armrest to open the deeper compartment.
In the deeper compartment there is space for
10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored
vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have
space.
G018372
G026704
G018371
04
There is space for a double cup holder under
the roller cover. The space can be used for
storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the
rear edge of the cup holder where there is a
recess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its
two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front
edge of the space and then press down the
rear edge of the cup holder.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge
from below and pulling forward.
106
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage compartment behind the gear
lever
Bottle holder*
Ashtray*
When there are no buttons for parking assistance and BLIS, see page 153 and page
155, the space can be used as a storage compartment.
A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on
the rear of the tunnel console.
G019622
G017441
04
An ashtray is located towards the rear of the
tunnel console.
Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the
cover.
Emptying the ashtray:
1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustration, and tilt the cover up.
2. Then lift the ashtray out.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
04 Interior
Rear seat
Head restraint, rear
Tipping the rear seat backrest
All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to
suit the height of the passenger. The upper
edge of the head restraint should be aligned
with middle of the back of the head. Raise the
head restraint as necessary. To lower the head
restraint, press the button by the right-hand
pillar at the same time as pushing down the
head restraint. To remove the head restraint,
press the button by the right-hand pillar while
lifting out the head restraint.
Lowering the backrest
The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards
together, or individually, to make it easier to
transport long objects. To avoid damaging the
seatbelts when folding the backrests up or
down, these should be hooked onto the grab
handles.
Location of head restraint under seat cushion
1. Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before
lowering or raising the backrests.
Lowering the backrest.
Rear edge of seat cushion
Lock catch
IMPORTANT
The head restraints could be damaged if
they are not removed for loading. The head
restraint in the centre must also be removed
for heavy loads.
108
G020790
G014845
G020765
04
2. Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to
fold the seat cushions forward.
3. Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to
release the backrest. A red indicator on the
lock catch shows that the backrest is no
longer locked in place.
04 Interior
Rear seat
4. Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and
remove the head restraints on the outside
seats. The centre seat's head restraint
must be removed for a fully level floor.
5. Place the head restraints in the plastic
sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised
seat cushions.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
04
WARNING
Remember to take down the seatbelts once
you have raised the backrest.
109
04 Interior
Cargo area
Safety net*
over towards the left bracket to fit it in
place.
Safety grille*
3. Check that the attachments on the safety
net are securely fastened in the keyed
recesses in the roof panel.
Using the safety net with lowered
backrests
The safety net can also be used when the
backrests are lowered. In this case, use the
front attachment points in the roof panel.
04
The retractable safety net storage cassette is
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
Using the safety net with raised
backrests
1. Pull out the safety net horizontally backward. Extend the right hand attachment
and hold it extended. Insert the attachment
into the rear keyed recess in the roof panel.
Press the attachment forward in the keyway. The attachment must be pressed so
far that the flange rides over the restriction
between the front and rear holes.
1. Pull one of the net's attachments rearward
to the large hole and pull it out.
2. Detach the other attachment in the same
way.
Removing the safety net storage
cassette
1. Lower the entire backrest.
2. Press the cassette outward to release it
from the mounting brackets.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
2. Do the same on the other side. The attachments on the net spring shut. Pull the net
110
G014730
G020768
Removing the safety net
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The safety grille is designed to help prevent
loads or pets from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. For safety reasons, the grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured.
Folding up
If the safety grille is in the way it can be folded
up to the roof:
1. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille.
2. Pull straight backward and upward. Then
release. The gas struts prevent the grille
from dropping down.
To fold down the grille, do the reverse.
04 Interior
Cargo area
Cargo cover*
Remove the safety grille as follows:
4. The button springs back when the cargo
cover is correctly located.
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward slightly
(to relieve the load from the gas struts).
5. Repeat the procedure on the opposite
side.
Removing
2. Remove the caps from the nuts on either
side that secure the safety grille.
3. Unscrew the nuts until the threads are flush
with the edge of the nuts.
4. Turn the grille backward in the car slightly
to release it from the trim. Do not angle the
grille too much as it can become wedged,
making it difficult to pull out.
5. Repeat for the other mounting and then
carefully lift the grille out of the car.
Cargo cover.
Fitting
Fitting the cargo cover.
To fit the safety grille:
1. Follow the instructions in the reverse order.
2. Tighten the two nuts to 24 Nm.
If unsure about installing or removing the safety
grille, consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
G020767
G020766
04
Fit the cargo cover as follows:
1. Move the front section of the cargo cover
backwards/over the cassette.
6. Check that the cargo cover is fitted firmly
in the cargo area.
2. Following which, fit the cargo cover in its
tracks along the side panels, furthest into
the cargo area.
7. Fit the front section of the cargo cover in
the wedge shaped tracks on the side panels, against the rear seat.
3. Push the button forward so that the
catches are retracted. Following which,
press the cargo cover down in the track.
8. The cargo cover is now ready for use.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the cargo cover or
on its front section.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
04 Interior
Cargo area
Use
Pull the cargo cover over the cargo area and
hook it into the tracks in the rear pillars in the
cargo area.
Using the safety net together with the
cargo cover
Removing the cargo cover.
1. Lift up the front section of the cargo cover,
move it backwards and then allow it to
hang free.
Load retaining eyelets*
2. Move the button forwards, lift up one end
of the cargo cover. Repeat on the opposite
side. Following which, pull out the cargo
cover.
1. Tip the backrests slightly forward to
access the safety net cassette. Start with
the 40% section.
2. Extend the safety net rearward.
G014757
G020769
04
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
3. Fold the backrests back up.
4. Hook the net into the attachment points in
the roof panel as described for raised
backrests.
112
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo
area.
04 Interior
Cargo area
Bag holder*
Electrical socket in cargo area*
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket. It works irrespective of whether or not
the ignition is switched on.
NOTE
Remember not to use the electrical socket
with the engine switched off because of the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
G014756
G014731
04
The bag holder holds shopping bags in place
and prevents them from tipping over and spilling their contents in the cargo area.
1. Open the hatch in the cargo area.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
Remote control key with key blade.......................................................
Active locks...........................................................................................
Keyless drive*........................................................................................
Battery in remote control key................................................................
Locking and unlocking..........................................................................
Child safety locks..................................................................................
Alarm*....................................................................................................
114
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
116
119
120
123
124
127
128
LOCKS AND ALARM
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Remote control key
Loss of a remote control key
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys.
If you lose a remote control key, take the car
and the other remote control keys to a Volvo
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The code of the missing
remote control key must be erased from the
system as a theft prevention measure.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended for ordering new key blades.
A maximum of six remote control keys/key
blades can be programmed and used for one
single car.
05
Turn signal indication during locking/
unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the remote
control key or Keyless drive system, two short
flashes of the direction indicators serve to indicate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with one
long flash and only if all locks are locked, after
the doors and the tailgate have been closed.
Personal preferences in the menu system can
be used to the deactivate indication via the
direction indicators. There will then be no visual
indication as to whether the lock status is correct, see page 78.
116
Immobiliser
The remote control keys are fitted with coded
chips. The code must be accepted by the
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The car
can only be started if the correct remote control
key with the correct code is used.
G019402
The remote control keys contain detachable
metal key blades for mechanical locking/
unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
Remote control key functions
Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate.
Press and hold to also close the side windows and sunroof.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and the
tailgate.
Approach lighting – Switches on the lighting at a distance – lights up the area around
a car parked in a dark location. Press the
button once to switch on the interior lighting, position/parking lamps, number plate
lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The
lighting is switched off automatically after
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on
setting the delay time, see page 78.
Detachable key blade
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Inserting the key blade
Tailgate – Press the button once to unlock
the tailgate only.1
Be careful when inserting the key blade into the
remote control key.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the red
button for at least three seconds or press
it twice within three seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button
once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 30 seconds.
1. Hold the remote control key with the narrow end pointing down and lower the key
blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in
position. You should hear a "click".
G019403
Unlocking doors with the key blade
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote control
key is particularly sensitive - this contains
the chip. The car cannot be started if the
chip is damaged.
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
•
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking is not activated with the
remote control key, see page 121.
access to the glovebox can be blocked,
see page 118.
Removing the key blade
To remove the key blade from the remote control key:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
1
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be
unlocked and opened as follows:
05
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door
keyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and
open the door.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 129.
The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.
``
117
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Locking the glovebox
NOTE
The remote control key cannot unlock the
glovebox without the key blade.
G020034
This function is particularly useful for when
the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
05
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 117.)
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
±
118
Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
05 Locks and alarm
G019450
Active locks
Active locks for remote control key with
key blade.
05
Active locks for remote control key without
key blade.
119
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Keyless lock and ignition system
Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the
car
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remote
control key must be no more than approx.
1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.
This means that the person who wishes to
open a door must have the remote control key
with him or her. It is not possible to open a door
if the remote control key is on the other side of
the car.
G019451
The grey area in the illustration indicates the
range covered by the system's antennas.
05
Keyless function range
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key. You simply need to have the remote
control key with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, for example with shopping
bags in one hand and a child in the other. It
saves you having to take out or look for the
remote control key.
The two remote control keys incorporate the
keyless drive function. You can order additional remote controls. The keyless drive system can handle up to six remote controls.
120
If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless
drive remote control key with them, a warning
message appears on the information display
and a reminder signal sounds. The warning
message disappears when the remote control
key is brought back to the car or when the ignition dial is turned to position 0. The warning is
only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or
II after someone has opened and closed a
door.
The warning message and reminder signal disappear when the remote control key is brought
back to the car after one of the following
actions:
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
a door has been opened and closed
the ignition dial has been turned to position
0
•
the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control key in the
car
If a remote control key with keyless drive function is left in the car, it is made passive when
the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised
entry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds the
remote control key, it can be activated and
used again. It is therefore important to handle
all remote control keys with equal care.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic screening and fields can interfere with the keyless drive system. To avoid
this: do not place the remote control key near
mobile phones, metallic objects or, for example, in a metal briefcase.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and key blade in the
normal way, see page 116.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Locking
Unlocking doors with the key blade
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system and
automatic transmission the gear selector
must be moved to the P position and the
ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Otherwise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles.
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas, the doors
and the tailgate are locked as follows:
±
Push in the lock button on one of the door
handles.
All doors must be closed before the lock button
is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the
inside of the doors retract.
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant handle.
G020225
G020033
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas:
2. Open the tailgate by pressing under the
tailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.
05
If for some reason the keyless drive function in
the remote control key is not operating, the car
can be unlocked using the remote control key
functions, see page 116.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
Power seat – remote control key with
memory function
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out
the plastic cover in the handle by inserting
the key blade in the hole on the bottom of
the cover.
If several people with keyless drive remote
control keys get into the car, then the driver's
seat will be adjusted for the person who opens
the door first.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Door handle, right-hand rear
NOTE
Centre console, under the rear section
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 129.
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
Antenna location
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personal
preferences applied, see page 78.
G020074
05
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Door handle, left-hand rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control key
Low battery in remote control key
When the battery runs down and full functionality cannot be guaranteed, the information
and display show KEY BATTERY
symbol
LOW VOLTAGE or CAR KEY - CHANGE
BATTERY.
Changing the remote control key
battery
1. Place the remote control key with the keypad downward and prize up the cover
using a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and
(–) sides are fitted (there is a diagram under
the cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its terminals with
your fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in.
Dispose of the old battery in an environmentally-responsible manner.
G019406
05
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals
from the remote control key at a normal distance, the battery should be replaced
(type CR 2450, 3 V).
123
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Locking/unlocking the car from
outside
WARNING
Be aware that you can be locked in the car
if it is locked from the outside with the
remote control key. You cannot then leave
the car using any of the controls inside the
car.
For cars with the Keyless system, see
page 120.
Unlocking
05
Rapid closing
•
One press unlocks the doors and the tailgate
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) on the
remote control key's lock button to close all
windows and sunroof* at the same time.
•
One press unlocks the driver's door and a
second press unlocks the other doors and
the tailgate.
Different personal settings can be made, see
page 78.
Locking
The remote control key lock button locks the
doors and the tailgate at the same time - the
doors' lock button and door handles on the
inside are disengaged*.
124
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
Tailgate
Unlocking
Unlocking tailgate only:
±
NOTE
The car can be locked even if the tailgate is
open - when the tailgate is then closed there
is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically (does not apply to locking
from inside). This function reduces the risk of
the car being left unlocked unintentionally. (For
cars with alarms, see page 129.)
Press the remote control key's button to
unlock the tailgate.
Locking
If the doors are locked when the tailgate is
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the
remote control key's lock button or from inside
to lock both doors and the tailgate.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G007451
Using the remote control key's unlock button
the car can be unlocked in two different ways
(select in personal settings, see page 78):
Automatic relocking
The doors and the tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking
Automatic locking
±
Press the upper section of the central lock.
ing button
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate are locked automatically.
A long press (at least 4 seconds) also
opens all the side windows simultaneously
- for example, to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather.
When the function is activated and the doors
have been locked they can be opened in two
ways:
Locking
±
Press the lower section of the central lock.
ing button
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
close all windows and the sunroof* at the
same time.
All doors can be locked with each respective
door's lock button.
Opening the doors
When the doors are locked from the inside:
±
Pull the handle twice to unlock and open
the door.
A
Pull one of the door handles twice
Press the upper section of the central lockand pull the door handle.
ing button
The function can be activated/deactivated by
means of personal preferences, see page 78.
Deadlocks*
E
B
D
C
05
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked with
the remote control key.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after a 25 second delay
after the doors are locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
G026307
A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its
lock button.
•
•
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
sage Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.
This is carried out as follows:
•
or
If the locking system shall not be changed:
Select no options at all and lock the car. Or
press EXIT and lock the car.
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 78).
2. Select Reduced guard.
05
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard - See manual and the
deadlocks function is switched off when
the car is locked.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
•
Remember that the car's alarm is armed
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm will be triggered.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system display shows the message Press ENTER to
reduce guard until engine is started.
EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:
•
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off: Press ENTER and lock the car.
If the car is equipped with an alarm with movement and tilt detectors* then these are
switched off at the same time, see page 129.
The next time the remote control key is turned
to key position II the system is reset to zero and
the instrument panel display shows the mes-
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual select, child lock, rear doors
Electrical locking of the rear doors and
power windows*
The lamp in the button illuminates when the
lock is active.
NOTE
G017440
G014697
Cars with electric child safety locks do not
also have manual child locks.
Manual child lock in left-hand rear door.
The door cannot be opened from inside.
Driver's door control panel.
The door can be opened from inside.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
The child safety lock controls are found on the
trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate or deactivate the child safety locks:
1. Remove the remote control key's key
blade.
2. Turn the control using the key blade.
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
05
1. Child safety locks are activated in key position I or II.
2. Press the switch on the driver's door.
A message appears on the information display.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Alarm system
Alarm indicator
NOTE
When the alarm is armed, it continually monitors all alarm inputs.
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
The alarm is triggered if:
05
•
•
a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector)
•
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
Arming the alarm
a non-approved key is used in the ignition
or if an attempt is made to force the lock
±
G020227
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's
direction indicators have made one long
flash and the LED on the instrument panel
flashes once every other second.
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm and until key position II is activated
– the alarm has been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. At which point you
should contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the remote control key lock button.
A long flash from the car's direction indicators confirms that the alarm is armed
and that the doors are locked.
Disarming the alarm
±
Press the remote control key unlock button. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm is
disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
Remote control key not working
Reduced alarm level
This function prevents you accidentally leaving
the car without the alarm on.
If none of the doors or the tailgate are opened
within two minutes of disarming the alarm (and
the car has been unlocked with the remote
control key), the alarm is automatically
rearmed. The car is locked at the same time.
A
Press the unlock button on the remote
control key or insert the key in the ignition
switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from
the direction indicators.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following happens:
•
•
A siren sounds for less than 25 seconds.
The siren has its own battery which is used
if the car battery has insufficient charge or
is disconnected.
The direction indicators flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated.
E
B
D
C
05
If for some reason the remote control key is not
working, the alarm can still be switched off and
the car started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
The alarm is triggered and the siren
sounds.
G026307
±
G019420
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First
remove the knob by pressing in the
catch (1) and pulling out (2).
Display
3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The
alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote
control key is turned to key position II.
EXIT
MENU
ENTER
Navigation
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm for example when leaving a dog in the car or
during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily switched off.
the instrument panel display shows the message Full guard at which the movement and
tilt detectors and the deadlocks function are reengaged.
This is carried out as follows:
or
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 78).
•
2. Select Reduced guard.
05
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard - See manual and the
movement and tilt detectors are switched
off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system display shows the message Press ENTER to
reduce guard until engine is started.
EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:
•
If the movement and tilt detectors shall be
deactivated: Press ENTER and lock the
car.
If the car is equipped with the deadlocks function then it is switched off at the same time, see
page 125.
The next time the remote control key is turned
to key position II the system is reset to zero and
130
If the detectors shall not be switched off:
Select no options at all and lock the car. Or
press EXIT and lock the car.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment
1. Open all the windows.
2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is
confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Test the movement detector in the passenger compartment, such as by lifting out
a bag from a seat. A siren should sound
and all direction indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for doors
1. Arm the alarm.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Open one of the doors. A siren should
sound and all direction indicators should
flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
detector.
2. Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock
the doors with the button on the remote
control key.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard. A siren should sound and all
direction indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
05 Locks and alarm
05
131
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
134
136
137
139
141
142
144
148
149
151
153
155
159
161
162
164
166
170
171
G020912
General..................................................................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Starting the engine................................................................................
Starting the engine – Flexifuel...............................................................
Keyless drive*........................................................................................
Manual gearbox....................................................................................
Automatic gearbox................................................................................
All-wheel drive.......................................................................................
Brake system........................................................................................
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*......................................
Park Assist*...........................................................................................
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
Start assistance....................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing equipment*...............................................................................
Detachable towbar*..............................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Adjusting headlamp pattern..................................................................
STARTING AND DRIVING
06
06 Starting and driving
General
06
134
Economical driving
Slippery driving conditions
Open tailgate
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
For more advice on reducing environmental
impact. see page 12.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is necessary to drive with the tailgate open for a short
distance:
•
Get the engine warmed up as soon as possible.
•
Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light
loads as soon as it is possible.
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat.
•
A cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
•
Avoid braking too hard.
1. Close all windows.
Engine and cooling system
Avoid overheating the cooling system
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the
car.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
•
Do not use winter tyres when the roads are
dry.
•
•
Remove load carriers when they are not
being used.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille if driving in extreme high temperatures.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
2. Set the air distribution to the windscreen
and floor and run the fan at high speed.
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
Avoid overheating the engine
Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) if driving with a
trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil temperature could then become too high.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability
of the oils and shortens the service life of the
systems.
06 Starting and driving
General
When driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling after
driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time. This could
cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to
restart. Tow the car from the water.
Do not overload the battery
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
windscreen wipers
audio equipment (high volume)
parking lights.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off.
If the battery voltage is low, a message appears
on the display. The energy-saving function
shuts down certain functions or reduces the
load on the battery by, for example, slowing the
ventilation fan and switching off the audio system.
Charge the battery by starting the engine.
06
The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees. Avoid having the
remote control key in position II when the
engine is switched off. Use key position I
instead, as less power is consumed.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area
supplies power even when the remote control
key has been removed from the ignition switch.
Examples of functions that use a lot of power:
135
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler flap
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.
Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be
ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
Filling up with fuel
G015313
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater
before refuelling!
06
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the
lighting panel, see page 56. The engine must
be switched off before the flap can be opened.
The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing
Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Fuel cap
1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resistance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a
stop.
136
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified
should not be used as engine power and fuel
consumption can be negatively affected, see
page 276.
Petrol
IMPORTANT
Do not add cleaning additives to the petrol,
unless recommended by Volvo.
For more information on petrol, see
page 277.
Diesel
At low temperatures (–5 °C to –40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. For more information, see page 277.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold
months.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine
±
Apply the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox
±
Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch
pedal fully depressed. This is particularly
important in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock could
otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
The remote control key must be in key position II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects
the environment.
Starting the engine
Key positions
Petrol
0 – Locked position
±
Turn the remote control key to key position
III. If the engine does not start within
5–10 seconds, release the key and try
again.
The steering lock is activated
when the remote control key
is removed from the ignition
switch.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
II.
> An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine preheating is underway, see page 49.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III when
the indicator symbol goes out.
Autostart (5-cylinder)
With the autostart function, there is no need to
hold the remote control key (or ignition dial on
cars with Keyless Drive, see page 120) in key
position III until the engine has started.
I – Radio position
Certain electrical components can be switched on.
The engine's electrical system is not activated.
II – Driving position
The remote control key's
position when driving. The
car's electrical system is
energised.
06
Turn the ignition key to the start position III and
just release it - the starter motor then works
automatically until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold
without waiting for engine preheating, then
the automatic start sequence can be
delayed for a couple of seconds.
``
137
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
III – Start position
The starter motor is engaged.
When the remote control key
is released it springs back
automatically to the driving
position, once the engine has
started.
A ticking sound may be heard if the key is
between positions. Turn the remote control key
to position II and back to eliminate the sound.
When the steering lock is activated
If the front wheels are positioned so that there
is tension in the steering lock, a warning message may be shown on the information display
and the car prohibited from starting.
06
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch and turn the steering wheel
so that the tension is released.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt
to start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock would
be activated, making it impossible to steer
the car.
138
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car,
especially if there are children in the car.
Make sure the steering lock is activated when
the car is left to reduce the risk of theft.
Remote control keys and electronic
immobiliser
The remote control key must not hang with
other keys or metal objects on the same key
ring. The electronic immobiliser could be activated accidentally.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
General information about starting
with Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in a
petrol-engined car, see page 137.
NOTE
The immobiliser is activated in the event of
repeated start attempts. Before a new start
attempt is made the key/dial must first be
turned back to position I or 0.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine still does not start
±
Please wait for one minute, fully depress
the accelerator pedal and repeat the previous procedure.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeated
start attempts, contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Engine block heater*
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt, proceed as follows:
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should
be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick
starting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the time
required with the engine block heater. At
-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3
hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater*. Starting and driving with a preheated engine involves significantly lower
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.
The engine block heater is powered by high
voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an electric engine block heater and its electrical
connections must only be carried out by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III.
3. When the engine has started, ease the
accelerator pedal gradually as the engine
speed increases.
06
If the engine has not started after
10 seconds, second attempt
±
Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III until the engine starts, but
not longer than 60 seconds.
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower
than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel
tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can
may make the engine difficult to start in
extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the
reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E85 fuel, see page 277.
Fuel adaptation
06
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is important to allow the engine to accustom itself
(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when the
car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
140
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
Starting the car
General
±
Starting with the remote control key
Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual
gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with automatic gearbox).
Petrol engine
±
Press in and turn the ignition dial to key
position III.
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key, see page 120.
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the
same way as the remote control key. One precondition for starting the car is that the car's
remote control key is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.
1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II
and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in
the combined instrument panel goes out,
see page 49.
G019420
G019410
Diesel engine
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to
position III.
If the remote control key's battery is discharged then the Keyless Drive function does
not work. In which case, start the car by using
the remote control key as ignition dial.
06
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition
switch.
3. Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and start in the same way as
with the ignition dial.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
Gear positions - five-speed
•
Gear shift indicator - GSI*
GSI - Gear Shift Indicator advises the driver of the optimum time to change gear.
The indication is given with an
arrow for up and down shifting respectively in the lower
information display of the
combined instrument panel, see page 47.
To engage reverse gear, the gear lever
must first be put in position N. Reverse
gear cannot therefore be engaged directly
from fifth gear due to the reverse gear
inhibitor.
Gear positions - six-speed (petrol)
G018256
Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
•
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
G018257
06
G018258
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is stationary.
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
•
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
It may be difficult to find the positions for fifth
and sixth gear when the car is stationary as the
reverse gear inhibitor (which blocks sideways
movement towards reverse) is then not activated.
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
(petrol)
NOTE
Reverse gear is electronically blocked if the
car is travelling faster than
approx. 20 km/h.
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
(diesel)
G018259
G018261
G018262
Gear positions - six-speed (diesel)
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is stationary.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
•
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
06
Only engage reverse gear when the car is stationary.
•
Engage reverse gear by pressing down the
gear lever and moving it to the left.
143
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Geartronic automatic gear positions
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed to
move the gear lever from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Always apply the
parking brake when parking the car.
G018264
06
– left-hand position: Automatic gear
changing.
M – right-hand position: Manual gear changing.
P – Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
144
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever from position D to the right-hand end
position at M. The information display shifts the
indication from D to one of the figures 1–6,
depending which gear is engaged just then,
see page 47.
N – Neutral
•
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake when the car
is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position at M.
•
Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to
change down a gear and release the lever.
R – Reverse
D
Geartronic manual gear positions
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed to
move the gear selector from the N position
if the car has been stationary for more than
3 seconds.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts up and down depending on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
The manual gearshift mode M can be selected
at any time while driving.
To return to automatic driving mode: move the
lever to the left-hand end position at D.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Keylock
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
To remove the remote control key, the gear
selector must be in the P position. The key is
locked in all other positions.
Safety function
Parking position (P)
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
Stationary car with engine running:
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
G020237
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
±
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Hold your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P position)
To be able to move the gear selector from
the P position to other gear positions, the ignition key must be in position II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
06
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least three seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked in the N
position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition key
must be in position II.
``
145
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move
the car:
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear
edge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote
control key.
G018263
3. Hold the key blade down and at the same
time move the gear lever out of the P position.
In certain cases, it may be necessary to move
the car when it is not driveable, for example if
06
146
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low temperatures. To reduce engine emissions, the gearbox shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature when
the engine is started, the idle speed after a
cold start may be higher than normal for
certain engine types.
Text message and action
In some situations the display can show a message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Symbol
A
Display
Driving characteristics
Action
TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO
HOLD
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.
Gearbox overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brakeA.
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Gearbox overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.
TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:
Run the engine at idling speed with the gear
lever in the N or P position until the message clears.
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the gearbox
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated intentionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
06
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 52.
147
06 Starting and driving
All-wheel drive
All-wheel drive – AWD*
All-wheel drive is always engaged.
06
All-wheel drive means that all four road wheels
are driven at the same time. Power is automatically distributed between front and rear
wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the pair of wheels
that grips best. This provides the best traction
and prevents wheel spin.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
pressed about five times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off,
press the brake pedal sharply once, not
repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the
circuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further and
may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure
on the pedal is needed to produce the normal
braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The anti-lock braking system
(ABS) prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will
perform a brief self-test at a speed of
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as
pulses in the brake pedal.
If the brakes are used heavily
To get the most out of the ABS:
When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.
Pulses will be felt.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do
not release the pressure on the pedal.
06
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traffic-free area and in different weather conditions.
The ABS symbol illuminates for two seconds if
there was a fault in the ABS system when the
engine was last running.
``
149
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
(Emergency Brake Assistance) For sudden
braking, full-strength braking is provided
instantaneously. The EBA function senses
when heavy braking is underway by registering
how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the
brake pedal. The function is suspended when
the pressure on the brake pedal eases. This
function is always active. It cannot be disengaged.
WARNING
06
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a
fault in the brake system. If the level in the
brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,
drive carefully to the nearest workshop and
have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
150
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
General
Spin Control
The stability and traction control system, STC/
DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control)
helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves
the car's traction.
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC
depending on market. The table shows the
integral functions of the respective systems.
Reduced operation
Function/system
STC
Active Yaw Control
Traction control system
The stability system is activated automatically
each time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and acceleration can be partially deactivated. Operation
during skidding is then delayed and so allows
more skidding which provides greater freedom
for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or
sand is improved at the same time as acceleration is no longer limited.
Operation
±
DSTC ON means that the system function
is unchanged.
DSTC
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that
system operation is reduced.
X
Spin Control
X
X
Traction control system
X
X
±
G029057
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Turn thumbwheel until the STC/DSTC
menu is shown.
Thumbwheel1
Press and hold the RESET button until the
STC/DSTC menu is changed.
06
At the same time the symbol
illuminates as a reminder that the system has
been reduced.
The system remains reduced until the
engine is next started.
RESET button1
1
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the
driving characteristics of the car.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
DSTC system
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on
the display and the symbol
illuminates
each time the engine is started.
Messages on the information display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF means that the system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature. The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
06
If the symbols
and
are displayed at the
same time: Read the message on the information display.
If the symbol
appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
•
Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC
system is now being activated.
±
•
Constant glow for two seconds means
system check when the engine is started.
•
Constant glow after starting the engine or
while driving means that there is a fault in
the STC/DSTC system.
•
Constant glow after deactivation reminds
that the STC/DSTC system has been
reduced.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
If the message remains when the engine is
restarted, drive to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
152
Information
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
General information on parking
assistance
•
•
Rear only.
Limitations
Both front and rear.
The system must be deactivated when reversing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
Function
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. If the volume of another
audio source from the audio system is high,
then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this
distance both behind and in front of the car, the
signal alternates between left and right-hand
speakers.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
Rear parking assistance only
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
obstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the
driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. Be aware of children or animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged and the message Park
Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on
the audio system display.
06
If the system is switched off, the display shows
Park Assist deactivated Enter to activate
as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change
the settings, see page 78.
The distance covered behind the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the
rear loudspeakers.
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
Front
Front parking assistance is active at speeds
below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at
higher speeds. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in
front comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations
Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affected by the extra lights.
Fault indicator
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Rear
06
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles
behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
See the previous section Rear parking assistance only.
154
Cleaning the sensors
If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the
display shows PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED then parking assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020770
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
General
BLIS is an information system that under certain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direction in the so-called "blind spot".
Blind spots
B
The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
A
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illuminates with a constant glow.
G020296
G020295
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cameras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the system's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
in the information display. In such cases, check
and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system
can be switched off temporarily by pressing the
BLIS button, see page 156.
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
06
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtake
another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h
faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h
faster than your vehicle.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is reversing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
06
In darkness the system reacts to the headlamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with
headlamps that are switched off are not
detected by the system. This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer
without headlamps which is towed behind a
car or truck.
WARNING
Activating/deactivating
The system does not react to bicycles or
mopeds.
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by
intensive light or when driving in the dark
when there are no light sources (e.g. street
lighting or other vehicles). The system may
then interpret the lack of light as if the cameras have been blocked.
In both cases a message is shown on the
information display.
When driving in such conditions system
performance may be temporarily reduced
and a text message is shown, see
page 157.
If the message disappears automatically
then BLIS has returned to normal functionality.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by
pressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
dashboard display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
156
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
ton to clear the text message. For more information on messages, see page 52.
BLIS system message
Text on the display
Specification
BLIS ON
BLIS system on.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
The BLIS camera is
disrupted by fog or
strong sunlight, for
example, shining
directly into the
camera.
The camera resets
itself when the environment has
returned to normal.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cameras blocked.
Clean the lenses.
Text on the display
Specification
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot system
disengaged.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
Contact with an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
BLIS OFF
BLIS system off.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on isolated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Cleaning
06
In order to work most effectively the BLIS camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
06 Starting and driving
G018177
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low sun in the camera.
06
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
Start assistance
WARNING
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start it, see page 161.
The steering lock remains in the position it
was in when the power was cut off. The
steering lock must be unlocked before towing.
IMPORTANT
The remote control key must be in position
II. Never remove the key from the ignition
switch while driving or when the car is being
towed.
Bump starting the car can damage the catalytic converter.
Towing
NOTE
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
If the car is de-energised then the steering
lock must be unlocked using a donor battery before towing can be started.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II
and unlock the steering lock so that the car
can be steered, see page 138.
WARNING
2. The ignition key must remain in position II
while the car is being towed.
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently
depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent
jerks.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
Model 2.0 Auto
2.0 with automatic gearbox should not be
towed. As the transmission fluid cannot be
maintained at the correct operating temperature by the engine-driven circulation pump the
risk of damage to the gearbox is great.
However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous
position - not further than 30 km and not faster
than 30 km/h.
IMPORTANT
06
Towing at temperatures below freezing
point is strongly advised against.
Manual gearbox
±
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox
±
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
``
159
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
Towing eye
•
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
•
Refit the cover on the bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads, not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing
eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.
In which case, secure the tow rope in the
towbar.
06
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed
on the road. The towing eye is attached in the
recess on the right-hand side of the front or
rear bumper.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye (1) that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Release the cover on the bumper by pressing on the marking on the lower edge of the
cover.
Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up
to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to
tighten the towing eye.
160
For this reason it is advisable to store the
towbar's towball in the car, see page 164.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only be
towed with drive wheels raised from the
road.
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
Starting with a donor battery
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the engine in the other car and ensure
that the cars do not touch one another.
4. Connect the red jump lead between the
positive terminal on the donor battery (1+)
and the positive terminal in your car (2+).
5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to
the donor battery's negative terminal (3-).
G020298
6. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead to the earthing point (4–) by the lefthand strut tower.
If the battery in the car has become flat, you
can "borrow" electric current from either a separate battery or from another car. Always make
sure the crocodile clips on the jump leads are
attached securely to eliminate sparks during
the start attempt.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid risk of explosion:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0.
2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect the jump
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the
battery explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns. If the acid comes
into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush
with large quantities of water.
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical
attention immediately.
7. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle 1500 rpm.
8. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery.
9. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red.
06
Make sure that none of the clamps on the
black jump lead comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
161
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 263.
•
•
•
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised
Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with
the necessary equipment for driving with a
trailer.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
The engine and gearbox can overheat if the
car is driven with a heavy load in hot
weather. If the temperature gauge for the
engine's cooling system goes into the red
zone, stop and let the engine idle for a few
minutes. The automatic gearbox responds
through a built-in protection system. See
the message on the information display. If
the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
•
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket follows the
specified maximum towball load.
In the interests of safety, speed should be
restricted to 80 km/h, even if the laws of
certain countries allow for higher speeds.
•
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure decal location, see page 178.
•
Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball1.
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake. Block the wheels with chocks when
parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Please wait until it has been
driven at least 1000 km.
06
1
162
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
Does not apply to the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
Trailer weights
Information on permitted trailer weights, see
page 263.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
Automatic gearbox, driving with a
trailer
Parking on a hill
1. Apply the parking brake (handbrake).
2. Move the gear selector to parking position
P.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
Starting on a hill
1. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
2. Release the parking brake (handbrake).
Steep inclines
•
Select an appropriate manual gear position
when climbing steep inclines or at low
speeds. This prevents the gearbox from
changing up and keeps the gearbox oil
cooler.
•
Do not use a higher manual gear than the
engine can "handle". It is not always economical to drive in high gears.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Diesel 1.6D engine with manual
gearbox, driving with a trailer
If the car is driven with a major load in a hot
climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced
with one of a greater capacity than the standard model. Check with your nearest Volvo
dealer regarding the options for your car.
06
163
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
Towbar
Trailer cable
Storing the towball section
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the towball mounting instructions must be followed carefully, see page 166.
WARNING
Follow the assembly instructions for the
towball section carefully.
•
The towball section must be locked with
the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Towball section storage location.
Important checks
•
06
The towball section's towball must be
cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towball section after use
and store it in the appointed location in the
car, firmly fastened with its strap.
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the towball.
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G014589
•
G031118
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
G010393
G010387
G010388
Specifications
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
Fixed towbar standard
A
B
1115
81
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
06
113
Fixed towbar with Nivomat
1111
76
Detachable towbar standard
1115
81
Detachable towbar with Nivomat
1111
77
1
Side member
2
Ball centre
964
482
40
141
542
150
100
140
63
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
1. Remove the protective cover by first pressand then pulling the
ing in the catch
.
cover straight back
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
06
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020302
G017317
G020301
Fitting the towball
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
and turn the locking wheel antipress in
clockwise
until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
4. Insert the towball section until your hear a
click.
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
G020307
G020306
G020304
Detachable towbar*
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
7. Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
WARNING
06
If the towball section is not fitted correctly
then it must be removed and refitted in
accordance with the previous instructions.
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towball section should
be clean and dry.
168
G020301
G020310
G020309
Removing the towball
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
06 Starting and driving
2. Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
G017318
G020314
G020312
Detachable towbar*
4. Push on the protective cover.
06
WARNING
Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if
it is stored in the car, see page 164.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
06 Starting and driving
Loading
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 263.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a
lowered backrest.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery or the glass
surface of the tailgate.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out
of position by long loads, which could set the
car in motion.
06
To increase the size of the cargo area, the head
restraints can be removed and the seats folded
down, see page 108.
Place the load firmly against the backrest in
front.
170
•
The head rests can be removed so that
they are not damaged.
•
Put wide loads in the centre.
Load carriers*
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, it is recommended to use load carriers specially designed
for your car by Volvo.
Carefully follow the mounting instructions supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the load's size.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrest.
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
G021422
Headlamps with Xenon lights
G021421
Halogen headlamps
G020317
Correct light pattern for left or righthand traffic
Left-hand traffic.
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a
control in each headlamp housing to avoid
dazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminate
the verge.
WARNING
06
On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual
Xenon lamp replacement must be carried
out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The headlamps
must be handled with extreme caution due
to the Dual Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
171
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
174
178
181
183
185
G020918
General..................................................................................................
Tyre pressure........................................................................................
Warning triangle* and spare wheel* .....................................................
Changing wheels...................................................................................
Emergency puncture repair*.................................................................
WHEELS AND TYRES
07
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics and tyres
Speed ratings
New tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle registration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
Tyres are perishable. After a
few years they begin to
harden at the same time as
the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as
fresh tyres as possible when
you replace them. This is especially important
with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits
in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1502. The tyre
in the illustration was manufactured in week 15
of 2002.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 178.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
07
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
205
Section width (mm)
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
55
Ratio between section height and
width (%)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
R
Radial ply
V
240 km/h
16
Rim diameter in inches (")
W
270 km/h
91
Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
Y
300 km/h
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
The reason for this is that tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see previous illustration.
174
07 Wheels and tyres
General
More even wear and maintenance
G020323
Tyres with tread wear indicators
Tread wear indicators.
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 178. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
NOTE
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Tread depth
Winter tyres
Snow chains
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space
between the brake discs and the wheels is too
small.
IMPORTANT
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
07
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed specifically for the car
model, and tyre and wheel rim dimensions.
In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo
workshop.
``
175
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Rims and wheel nuts
IMPORTANT
The wheel nuts should be tightened to
110 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)
Steel rims are normally mounted with the
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn variety may also be used.
G020324
WARNING
Standard wheel nuts.
Bulge acorn wheel nuts.
Only use wheel rims that are tested and
approved by Volvo and which are included in
the Volvo genuine accessories range.
07
There are two types of wheel nut, depending
on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or
aluminium.
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims.
The wheel could come loose.
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2)
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with
aluminium rims. These differ markedly from
other nut types as they have a rotating conical
washer.
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
1. Tighten the wheel nuts to 110 Nm.
2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
176
Locking wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking
wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel
covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise
the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel is only intended to be used for
the short time it takes to get the normal wheel
replaced or repaired. Replace the spare wheel
with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The
car's handling may be altered by the use of the
spare wheel.
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Summer and winter wheels
rain, snow and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
G020325
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
see page 183, the wheels should be marked
with which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres
with a tread pattern which are designed to only
turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa.
07
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
177
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Recommended tyre pressure
Stated on the label:
•
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre size
•
•
ECO pressure
Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
G020791
NOTE
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar shows which pressures the tyres should
have at different load and speed conditions.
NOTE
Full load in the car equates to the number of
seats with seatbelts.
07
178
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel consumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified
tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre
pressure for maximum load is recommended
in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure table
Variant
Tyre size
Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Front (kPa)
A
Max. load
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear (kPa)
ECO pressureB
1.6
195/65 R15
0-160
210
210
250
250
250
1.8
205/55 R16
160+
250
210
280
260
-
205/50 R17
0-160
220
220
250
250
250
215/45 R18C
160+
260
220
280
260
-
205/55 R16
0-160
210
210
250
250
250
160+
250
210
280
260
-
205/50 R17
0-160
220
220
250
250
250
215/45 R18
160+
260
220
280
260
-
205/55 R16
0-160
210
210
250
250
250
160+
260
210
280
260
-
205/50 R17
0-160
220
220
250
250
250
215/45 R18
160+
270
220
290
270
-
1.8F
2.0
1.6D
2.4
2.4i
2.0D
T5
T5 AWD
07
``
179
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Variant
D5
Tyre size
Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
Front (kPa) A
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear (kPa)
ECO pressureB
205/55 R16
0-160
230
220
250
250
250
205/50 R17
160+
270
220
290
270
-
0-80
420
420
420
420
-
215/45 R18
Spare
wheelD
A
B
C
D
07
180
T125/85 R16
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Fuel-efficient driving, see page 178
1.6 cannot select this tyre.
Temporary Spare.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*
Warning triangle
Follow the regulations in force for the use of a
warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in
a suitable place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning triangle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take
the warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
firmly secured in the cargo area after use.
Spare wheel* and jack*
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.
The car's original jack*
The original jack must only be used for changing wheels. The jack's thread should always be
well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and
wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the
cargo area.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question.
2. Release the spare wheel and lift it out.
3. Take out the jack* plus crank and the wheel
wrench*.
Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into
the cargo area
07
1. Crank the jack (3) to halfway in order that
the jack shall fit horizontally in the bracket.
2. Fold in the handle (6) and place the wheel
wrench (2) on the jack.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel*
3. Put the jack (3) back in the hole on the right
(4). Fasten the spare wheel (1) in the hole
on the left (5).
Tools - returning into place
Tools and jack* must be returned into place in
the correct manner after use.
•
For cars equipped with spare wheel, the
jack must be cranked so that it fits into the
spare wheel.
•
For cars equipped with emergency puncture repair kit, the jack must be fully
cranked together and returned into the
foam block.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
First aid*
07
182
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Removing wheels
5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be
changed at a busy location. Make sure that the
car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question.
G020332
G020331
1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel
wrench* that are located under the carpet
in the cargo area. If another jack is
selected, see page 201.
WARNING
2. Apply the parking brake and engage first
gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by
hand.
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jacking point and the jack.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground. Check that the jack is seated correctly in the intended jacking point, as illustrated, and that the base is located directly
under it.
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel nuts are tightened
properly. Tighten to 110 Nm. Check the
torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
07
184
Ensure that passengers wait with the car or preferably a crash barrier - between them
and the road.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12V sockets for the compressor are located by
the centre console in the front, by the rear seat
and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
Overview
WARNING
You should not drive faster than80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit with compressor and tools are stored under the floor in
the cargo area.
G020400
Emergency puncture repair, general
information
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
Decal, maximum permitted speed
2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
07
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
Sealing punctured tyres
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is broken when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
G019723
WARNING
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
186
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
07
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is operating. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not continue. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
continue. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3
km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that
the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified on the tyre pressure decal.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
You should not drive faster than80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for
storing dangerous waste.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
07
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Wheels and tyres
07
189
190
G020920
Cleaning................................................................................................ 192
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 195
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 196
CAR CARE
08
08 Car care
Cleaning
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use
car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to
corrosion.
•
Do not park the car in direct sunlight.
Washing a car with hot paintwork can
cause permanent paintwork damage.
Wash the car in a car wash with waste
water separator.
•
•
Hose down the underbody thoroughly.
•
If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the
car using a cold degreasing agent.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
08
192
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp when it
has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on
chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a
sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it can never replace
a proper handwashing. The brushes of an automatic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork
than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is
also more sensitive when it is new. For this
reason, handwashing is recommended during the first few months with a new car.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts).
08 Car care
Cleaning
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
When using a pressure washer: Make sure
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not
closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured
plastic parts, rubber and trim components
(such as glossy trim mouldings). When using
such a cleaning agent the instructions must be
followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white
spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,
protection, lustre sealing or similar could
damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage
caused by such treatment is not covered by
Volvo warranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the waterrepellent properties. This should be used
first after three years and then each year.
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
08 Car care
Cleaning
Cleaning the interior
Treating stains on fabric upholstery
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fabric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the
fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and
approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex
100 standard.
The leather is refined and processed so that it
retains its natural characteristics. It is given a
protective coating, but regular cleaning is
required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment
of leather upholstery which, when used in
accordance with the instructions, preserves
the leather's protective coating.
08
194
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's
Leather care product.
IMPORTANT
Never use strong solvents. Such products
may damage fabric, vinyl and leather
upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Note that materials with colour that runs
when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)
may discolour the upholstery material.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
Paintwork
Stone chips and scratches
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
Colour code
G020345
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
Before touching up paintwork, the car must be
clean and dry and at a temperature above
15 °C.
Materials
Data plate.
Code for car colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product label location, see page 260.
•
•
•
•
Primer in a can
Paint in a can or touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare
metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,
you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged area.
08
195
08 Car care
Rustproofing
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
•
Keep the car clean. Hose down the underbody. If using a pressure washer, keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted surfaces.
•
Regularly check and touch-up the rustproofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at threeyear intervals. If the car needs further treatment, Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
08
196
08 Car care
08
197
198
200
201
202
204
209
211
213
219
G020922
Volvo service.........................................................................................
Self-maintenance..................................................................................
Bonnet and engine compartment.........................................................
Oils and fluids.......................................................................................
Wiper blades.........................................................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09
09 Maintenance and service
09
Volvo service
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accordance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo also recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to perform the
service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before beginning or performing
service work that affects the electrical system.
200
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance
Before starting work on the car
Raising the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.
See preceding illustration.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Check regularly
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
•
Coolant – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion
tank.
•
Engine oil – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
•
Power steering fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
•
Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well
filled. Use washer antifreeze at temperatures around freezing.
•
Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
High output from the ignition system. The
voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The ignition must therefore always
be switched off for work in the engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils
when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
09
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack other than one recommended by Volvo
is selected, then follow the instructions
included with the equipment
WARNING
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the subframe.
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start
automatically some time after the engine
has been switched off.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always
use axle stands or similar.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
201
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
G020793
Opening the bonnet
The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the
instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars
the handle is on the far right.) You will hear
when the catch releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the
front edge of the bonnet and press the
safety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (concealed behind the headlamp)
1
202
The location varies depending on engine alternative
Engine oil dipstick1
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand
drive)
Filler opening for engine oil1
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter1
1
The location varies depending on engine alternative
203
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
G020341
Dipstick, petrol engines.
G020340
Checking the engine oil and oil filter
Engine compartment decal for oil
grade
G020338
09
Dipstick, diesel engines. (D5, Euro 5 has an electronic dipstick.)
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see
the engine compartment decal. Check the
oil level frequently and change the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged if lower
grade oil is used or if the car is driven with
the oil level too low.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade than that specified on the decal,
see page 269.
204
Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with
the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil (see the engine compartment
decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the
odometer readings for oil changes.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
Checking the oil in a cold engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until
the oil level is nearer the MAX than the
MIN mark on the dipstick, see page 269
for capacities.
Checking the oil in a warm engine
1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off
the engine and then wait 10-15 minutes to
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
Checking the oil
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
G020336
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Certain models have both variants. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
dealer for further information.
09
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by
topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil
level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on
the dipstick, see page 269 for capacities.
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
``
205
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil consumption may increase if too much oil is
poured into the engine.
Washer fluid, topping up
NOTE
The oil level is only updated by the system
during driving. The system cannot detect
changes when oil is filled or drained.
If engine oil is filled or drained then the car
must be driven about 30 km before the oil
level is measured correctly.
For engines with electronic dipstick1
OK
All normal
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 59.
PLEASE WAIT
System initialised,
shown for
about 2 seconds
OIL LEVEL LOW.
FILL 1 LITRE OIL
Fill with engine oil,
see page 202, chapter "Engine compartment".
Checking the oil level:
1. Switch the ignition to key position II, see
page 137.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to position "OIL
LEVEL ENGINE".
> The oil level in the engine is then shown.
1
2
206
Only applies to diesel (D5) with Euro 5.
Depending on engine alternative.
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Shown when the
system has
detected something
that needs to be rectified in order to enable the correct information regarding oil
volume to be shown
G020335
Message
Location of washer fluid reservoir2.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on
page 273.
Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.
Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that
the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir
and hoses.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Mix the washer antifreeze and water before
filling the reservoir.
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water, see page 273. In the event of
any doubt about water quality, used
ready-mixed coolant in accordance
with Volvo recommendations.
G020334
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant, see page 273.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
09
not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures
could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)
to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when
the level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. High temperatures
can occur, causing a risk of damage
(cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 273.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
``
207
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
Checking and topping up the brake and
clutch fluid
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power
steering fluid
G020333
NOTE
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir3. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see the table Fluids on page 273.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
3
208
Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 269.
If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the car is without power and must be
towed, it can still be steered. However, the
steering will be much heavier than normal and
it will require more effort to turn the steering
wheel.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen
09
1. Turn up the wiper arm.
2. Press the button located on the wiper
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),
parallel with the wiper arm.
3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a
"click" is heard.
> Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed and fold down the wiper arm.
G020330
Changing the rear window wiper blade
NOTE
G014732
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the other side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 192.
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling it
towards the rear window.
G020329
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
3. Press the new wiper blade into position.
``
209
09 Maintenance and service
09
Wiper blades
> Check that it is firmly installed and fold
back the wiper arm.
210
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Battery care
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions and climatic conditions.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally correct manner as it contains lead.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect the jump
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the
battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If the acid comes into contact with eyes,
skin or clothing, flush with large quantities
of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek
medical attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
09
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
``
211
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
8. Remove the battery.
Fitting the battery
1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Fit the clamp securing the battery.
3. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
Risk of explosion.
4. Connect the positive lead.
5. Connect the negative lead.
6. Refit the cover over the battery.
Changing the battery
Removing the battery
1. Switch off the ignition and remove the
remote control key.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals. The car's electrical
system has to store information in the control modules.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the negative battery lead.
5. Disconnect the positive battery lead.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using
a screwdriver.
7. Release the clamp securing the battery.
212
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
General
Changing front bulbs
All bulb specifications are given on page 281.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then
forward.
The following list contains bulbs and pointsource lamps that are specialised or unsuitable
for changing except at a workshop:
4. Unplug the connector by pressing down
the clip with a thumb while moving out the
connector with the other hand.
•
•
•
General interior lighting in the roof
•
•
Brake light
09
Reading lamps and glovebox lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror and
approach lighting
G019599
Dual Xenon headlamps
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oil from your fingers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are
changed by first removing the lamp housing
from the engine compartment.
G019600
On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual
Xenon lamp replacement must be carried
out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The headlamps
must be handled with extreme caution due
to the Dual Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
Removing the lamp housing
1. Remove the remote control key and turn
the light switch to position 0.
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
Fitting the lamp housing
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp
housing and locking pin. Check that the pin
is correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
secured in place before the lighting is switched
``
213
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
Main beam, Halogen
on or the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch.
G019131
Fitting a new bulb
Removing the cover and bulb
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly
to the right in order to snap it into position.
1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see
page 213.
3. Press the connector back on.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove the
cover.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 213.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.
Press it in/down.
5. Pull out the bulb.
214
1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one position.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
G019136
G019133
Dipped beam
The illustration shows a halogen bulb.
1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see
page 213.
2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it anticlockwise.
3. Left-hand headlamp:
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
Turn the bulb holder clockwise.
4. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
5. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted
in one position.
6. Refit the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it clockwise.
4. Press the bulb holder back on. A "click" is
heard when the bulb holder is fitted correctly.
5. Refit the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it clockwise.
7. Refit the lamp housing, see page 213.
2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
3. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into
the lamp housing.
6. Refit the lamp housing, see page 213.
Position/parking lamps
09
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 213.
NOTE
A lamp equipped with "Active Bending
Lights* has a position lamp (LED) which cannot be replaced.
Side marker lamps
G018050
G019145
Direction indicators
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 213.
2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it anticlockwise.
G019150
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 213.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 213.
2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
3. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one
position.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
6. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. (The
profile of the bulb holder corresponds to
the profile of the foot of the bulb.)
4. Refit the lamp housing, see page 213.
Front fog lamps
7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
3. The bulbs are located in separate bulb
holders.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
5. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
6. Replace the bulb.
Removing the bulb holder
7. Plug in the connector.
8. Press the bulb holder into place and refit
the cover (A or B).
NOTE
G019605
If the error message remains after a faulty
bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
2. Undo the cover by inserting a screwdriver
as illustrated (vertically) and continue to
press vertically in order to undo the clip
inside the cover.
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced
from inside the cargo area.
3. Grip the edge of the cover and pull straight
out.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
4. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull
it out.
2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/righthand panel to access the bulbs.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
216
G019166
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
Location of the bulbs in the rear light
cluster
Brake light (LED)
4. Replace the bulb.
Position lamp
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
Position/parking lamps
09
Courtesy lighting
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
Rear fog lamp (one side)
G020795
Number plate lighting
G018058
There is courtesy lighting under the instrument
panel on the driver and passenger sides.
G014849
Bulb holder.
IMPORTANT
The cable for the brake light's LED lamps is
moulded into the upper bulb holder. It shall
not be removed.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lens detaches.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. Refit the lens.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
``
217
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
Cargo area
Vanity mirror lighting*
Fitting the mirror glass
1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of
mirror glass back into position.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
G020253
G014852
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
Removing the mirror glass
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right-hand sides (by the
black rubber sections), and prize carefully
so that the glass comes loose in the lower
edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with
a new one.
218
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General
All electrical functions and components are
fused to protect the car's electrical system
from damage by short circuiting and overloading.
The fuses are in two different locations in the
car:
•
Relay/Fuse box in the engine compartment.
•
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment.
09
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several spare
fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then
there is a fault in the component. In which case,
Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop for this to be checked.
``
219
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
G007446
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to
replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the
same colour and amperage.
•
•
19 – 36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
•
1–6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must
only be replaced by a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
7-18 are of the "JCASE" type, and for their
replacement we recommend that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop.
On the inside of the cover are tweezers to
assist removing and fitting fuses.
220
09 Maintenance and service
09
G020250
Fuses
1.
Radiator fan
2.
Power steering (excl. 1.6 litre
engine)
80 A
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
60 A
3.
4.
5.
6.
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
Climate control element,
additional heater PTC*
Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel)
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel)
50 A
60 A
80 A
60 A
70 A
7.
ABS pump
30 A
8.
ABS valves
20 A
9.
Engine functions
30 A
10.
Ventilation fan
40 A
11.
Headlamp washers
20 A
19.
Reserve
12.
Supply to heated rear window
30 A
20.
Horn
15 A
13.
Starter motor relay
30 A
21.
14.
Trailer wiring*
40 A
Fuel-driven additional heater,
passenger compartment
heater*
20 A
15.
Reserve
–
16.
Supply to infotainment system
30 A
17.
Windscreen wipers
30 A
18.
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
40 A
22.
Reserve
–
–
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
23.
24.
10 A
Transmission (TCM) (4-cyl.
auto.)
15 A
Heated fuel filter, PTC element oil trap (5-cyl. diesel)
34.
20 A
25.
Reserve
26.
Ignition switch
15 A
27.
A/C compressor
10 A
28.
Reserve
29.
Fog lamp, front
15 A
30.
Engine control module ECM
(1.6 l petrol, 2.0 l diesel)
3A
Voltage regulator, alternator
4-cyl.
10 A
31.
32.
222
33.
Engine control module ECM
(5-cyl. petrol), Transmission
(TCM) (5-cyl auto)
Injectors (5-cyl. petrol),
lambda-sond (4-cyl. petrol),
charge air cooler (4-cyl. diesel), mass air flow sensor and
turbo control (5-cyl. diesel)
–
35.
–
36.
10 A
Lambda-sond and vacuum
pump (5-cyl. petrol), engine
control module (5-cyl. diesel),
diesel filter heater (4-cyl. diesel)
20 A
Ignition coils (petrol), injectors
(1.6 l petrol), fuel pump (4-cyl.
diesel), pressure switch, climate control (5-cyl.), glow
plugs and EGR emission control (5-cyl. diesel)
10 A
Engine sensors for valves,
relay coil, air conditioning
PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl.
petrol), engine control module
ECM (5-cyl. diesel), canister
(petrol), injectors (1.8/2.0 l
petrol), MAF mass air flow
sensor (5-cyl. petrol, 4-cyl.
diesel), turbo control (4-cyl.
diesel), pressure switch
power steering (1.6 l petrol),
EGR emission control (4-cyl.
diesel)
15 A
Engine control module ECM
(not 5-cyl. diesel), accelerator
pedal position sensor,
lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel)
10 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
G020601
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses
are located under the glovebox. The box also
provides space for several spare fuses. Tools
for fuse replacement are located in the relay/
fuse box in the engine compartment, see
page 220.
Replacing fuses
completely. The fuse box can be fully
unhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of the
clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the
pins into the clips. This expands the clips
and secures the trim.
1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the
clips (1) about one cm and then withdrawing the clips.
2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove
them.
3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it
``
223
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
G020246
09
43.
44.
45.
46.
15 A
SRS system, engine control module ECM (5-cyl.)
10 A
Electrical socket, passenger compartment
15 A
50.
Reserve
51.
Additional heater for the
passenger compartment,
AWD, fuel filter relay,
heating
52.
–
56.
57.
10 A
58.
Main beam (right), auxiliary lamps relay coil
7.5 A
7.5 A
Seat heating (driver's
side)
15 A
Seat heating (passenger
side)
15 A
Sunroof
20 A
10 A
60.
47.
Interior lighting
5A
54.
Washer, rear window
15 A
10 A
61.
48.
Parking assistance,
Xenon*
Keyless control module
20 A
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
15 A
Main beam, left
Power steering
10 A
Data link connector
(DLC), brake light switch
59.
53.
SRS system
10 A
5A
5A
55.
Remote control module,
siren control module
Transmission control
module (TCM), ABS system
Passenger compartment, glovebox and
courtesy lighting
49.
224
Phone, audio system,
RTI*, Bluetooth*
62.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
63.
Supply to rear right door
64.
Reserve
65.
Infotainment system
66.
Infotainment control
module (ICM), climate
control
20 A
77.
–
5A
Electrical socket cargo
area, control module,
accessories (AEM)
15 A
78.
Reserve
79.
Reversing lamp
10 A
80.
Reserve
–
81.
Supply to rear left door
20 A
82.
Supply to front right door
25 A
83.
Supply to front left door
25 A
84.
Power passenger seat
25 A
85.
Power driver's seat
25 A
86.
Interior lighting, cargo
area lighting, power
seats, fuel level display
(1.8F)
5A
67.
Reserve
68.
Cruise control
5A
69.
Climate control, rain sensor, BLIS button
5A
70.
Reserve
–
71.
Reserve
–
72.
Reserve
–
73.
Sunroof, overhead console for interior lighting
(OHC), rear seatbelt
reminder, autodim mirror
5A
74.
Fuel pump relay
15 A
75.
Reserve
–
76.
Reserve
–
09
–
5A
–
225
226
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
228
230
234
239
242
243
250
253
G020924
General..................................................................................................
Audio functions.....................................................................................
Radio functions.....................................................................................
CD functions.........................................................................................
Menu structure – audio system.............................................................
Phone functions*...................................................................................
Menu structure – phone*.......................................................................
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10
10 Infotainment system
General
Infotainment system
trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see
page 66. The display (2) shows messages and
information on the current function.
10
Audio system
G020245
On/Off
POWER - button
Display
Keypad
MENU - Menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio system. If the audio system is active when the
remote control key is turned to position 0 then
it continues to be active until the remote control
key is removed from the ignition switch. The
audio system is started automatically the next
time the remote control key is turned to position I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are controlled via a menu system. The current menu
level is shown at the top right of the display.
Menu options are shown in the middle of the
display.
•
•
MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
•
ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates
one of the menu options.
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates the
audio system and phone*. The infotainment
system can be easily operated using the con1
228
Premium Sound.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Up/down with the navigation button (5)
moves between menu options.
•
EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the
menu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also be
selected directly with the keypad (3).
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with different options and different versions. There are
three audio system versions:
•
•
•
Performance,
High Performance* or
Premuim Sound*
FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is
however included in each version.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ distributes the
two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right
and rear speakers. This provides a more realistic sound quality than that provided by standard two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ and the
Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
10 Infotainment system
General
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II SystemŸ is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
10
229
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
Audio controls
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehicle speed, see page 233.
10
Audio source selection
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches
between FM1, FM2 and AM.
Repeatedly pressing MODE switches between
CD, USB and AUX.
External audio sources
G019805
General
AM/FM – Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX
and USB (e.g. iPodŸ)1
Use the MODE button to select the external
audio source you wish to use.
1. If USB is selected then Connect device is
shown in the display.
SOUND - Button
When the loading is finished the track information is shown on the display and it is possible
to select the track required.
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
Track selection can take place in two ways:
TUNING - Knob
Volume
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad
to regulate the volume, see page 66. Audio vol-
230
If you choose to connect an iPodŸ, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connection
then you can control the media via the car's
audio controls.
2. Connect your iPodŸ, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection in the
centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
> The text Loading appears on the display when the system loads the file
structure on the storage media. This
takes a while.
VOLUME - Knob
1
The AUX and USB inputs enable the connection of an external audio source, e.g. an
iPodŸ1 or MP3 player.
AUX input
USB input*
USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Select TUNING (3) clockwise or anticlockwise
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
2. or use the navigation control's (4) right or
left-hand button to scroll to the required
track.
It is also possible to change track using the
steering wheel keypad.
In USB or iPodŸ mode the infotainment system
operates in an equivalent way to the
CD player for playing back music files. For
more information, see page 239.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file formats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports the majority of
iPodŸ models produced in 2005 or later.
iPodŸ Shuffle is not supported.
USB memory
To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid storing any files other than music files in the memory. It takes considerably longer for the system
to load storage media that contains items other
than compatible music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maximum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPodŸ
An iPodŸ is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection via the player's connection cable. However, if the player's battery
is completely discharged then it must be
charged before the player is connected.
NOTE
sory manual for USB and iPodŸ Music Interface.
AUX
10
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio
volume of the external audio source is too high
then the sound quality can be impaired. Prevent this by adjusting the input volume of the
AUX input.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
Audio settings
Adjusting audio settings
Press SOUND repeatedly to browse among
the following options. Adjust by turning
TUNING.
When an iPodŸ is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPodŸ player's
own menu structure.
• BASS - Bass level.
• TREBLE - Treble level.
• FADER – Balance between the front and
For information on USB and iPodŸ in combination with Performance audio, see the acces-
• BALANCE – Balance between the left and
rear speakers.
right-hand speakers.
``
231
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
• SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub-
Surround2
10
• CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker.
Three channel stereo or Pro Logic IIŸ must
be activated before adjustment is possible,
see under the heading Activating/deactivating surround sound below.
• SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro
Logic IIŸ must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading
Audio settings below.
G021216
woofer must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
below.
Surround settings govern the spatial
perception of the sound. Settings
and activating/deactivating are separate for each audio source.
The DolbyŸ icon in the display indicates that
Dolby Pro Logic IIŸ is active. There are three
different settings for surround sound:
• Dolby Pro Logic II
• 3 channel
• Off - 2 channel stereo.
Activating/deactivating surround sound
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
•
•
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
•
Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.
Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Surround FM…, Surround
AM…, Surround CD…or Surround
AUX… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel
or Off and press ENTER.
2
3
4
232
Premium Sound.
Not available in AM and FM mode.
Certain audio systems.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Equalizer front/rear4
The equalizer can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
Adjusting equalizer
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Equalizer front… or Equalizer
rear… and press ENTER.
4. The graphic on the display indicates the
audio level of the frequency in question.
5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/
down with the navigation button. Additional frequencies can be selected using
the left/right navigation button.
6. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
Automatic volume control5
The auto volume control function allows the
audio volume to increase as the speed of the
car increases. There are three levels to choose
from: Low, Medium and High.
are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
10
Adjusting automatic volume control
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Auto. volume control… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press
ENTER.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*
5
Not Performance Sound.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
Radio controls
Tuning
Automatic tuning
10
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Give a brief press on
or
.
Manual tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
G019806
2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
FM/AM – Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING – Knob for station searches
or
Tune into a station with a long press on
. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
±
or
on the navigation button
Hold in
depressed until the desired frequency
appears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears on
the display, searching can be resumed by
or
.
briefly pressing
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO – Automatic storage of stations
Storing stations
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio stations and stores them automatically in a separate memory. The function is especially useful
in areas where the radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until
Autostoring appears on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the display, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Off appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now
be selected using the preset buttons (2).
±
Press EXIT (6).
Ten station presets can be stored per wavelength. FM has two memories for presets:
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering
wheel keypad.
Selecting an auto-stored preset
Storing stations manually
2. Press a preset button (2).
1. Tune into a station.
234
Automatic storage of stations
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
SCAN – Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
2. Hold a station preset button depressed
until the message Station stored appears
on the display.
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
> The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),
EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1).
Storing autostored presets in another
memory
Storing a station
Programme functions
A selected station can be stored as a preset
while SCAN is active.
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations
with certain programme types. If a required
programme type is located the radio can
switch stations interrupting the audio source
currently in use. For example, if the CD player
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting transmission is played at a preset audio volume, see
page 238. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and audio volume when the set
programme type is no longer broadcast.
±
An autostored preset can be transferred to the
FM or AM memory.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
3. Press the button under which the station
will be stored and hold it depressed until
the message Station stored appears on
the display.
> The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a preset.
Press a station preset button and hold it
depressed until the message Station
stored appears on the display.
> Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
RDS functions
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an
RDS radio the following functions:
•
Automatically switches to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Searches for programme form, such as
traffic information or news.
Scanning
•
SCAN (4) automatically searches through a
wavelength for strong stations. When a station
is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds
before scanning is resumed.
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (News), and programme types (PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For further programme interruption settings,
see EON and REG see page 237. The programme functions are modified via the menu
system, see page 228.
Returning to the interrupted audio
source
Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio
source.
Activating/deactivating Scan
Alarm
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
2. Press SCAN to activate.
> SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
10
``
235
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
Traffic information – TP
G021220
This function allows traffic information broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through. TP
shows that the function has been
activated. If the set station can send traffic
appears on the display.
information then
TP search is useful during long journeys while
an audio source other than the radio is being
played. The function automatically searches
for traffic information within different
RDS networks.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations
News
1. Select an FM station.
This function allows news broadcasts within a set station's
RDS network to break through. The
message News shows that the function is active.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Activating/deactivating News
The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to TP station… and press ENTER.
> Either TP from current station or TP
from all stations is shown on the display.
6. Press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to News station… and press
ENTER.
> Either Press ENTER to receive news
from this station only. or News from
all stations is shown on the display.
5. Press ENTER.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to
select different programme types,
such as Pop music and Serious
classic. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.
G021222
Activating/deactivating TP
2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
236
Activating/deactivating TP search
G021221
10
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Activating/deactivating PTY
1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations
4. Scroll to Select PTY… and press
ENTER.
> A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. The
PTY function is activated by selecting
programme types and deactivated by
clearing all PTYs.
The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.
Search PTY
Radio text
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the display.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Activating/deactivating radio text
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.
If the radio finds any of the selected programme types, then > appears on the display.
to continue
Press the navigation button
searching for another broadcast of the
selected programme types.
Automatic frequency update – AF
Display of programme type
The AF function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The radio may
sometimes need to search through the entire
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If
this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek
Press EXIT to cancel. appears in the display.
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating AF
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
1
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even
if its signal strength is low.
Regional indicates that the function
is active. The regional function is normally
deactivated.
10
G021223
5. Select the desired programme types or
Clear all PTY…
Activating/deactivating REG
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
The EON function is especially useful in urban
areas with many regional radio stations. It
allows the distance between the car and the
radio station transmitter to determine when
programme functions should interrupt the current audio source.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.
• Distant1 – interrupts if the station trans-
transmitter is close.
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
• Off – no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Factory sett.
``
237
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
Activating/deactivating EON
10
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to EON… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press
ENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Reset all… and press ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard at
the volume selected for each programme type.
If the volume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved
until the next programme interruption.
238
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
CD function controls
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and
change to CD mode by pressing MODE.
Pause
Starting playback (CD changer*)
If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when the audio system is activated
then playback starts automatically. Otherwise
change to CD changer mode using MODE and
select a disc with the number buttons 1–6 or
Up/Down on the navigation button.
Insert a CD
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files*
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA
format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files
cannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted
into the player the disc's directory structure is
read in. It may take a while before playback
starts due to the quality of the disc.
CD changer position selection*
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
Navigation and playback
CD eject
If a disc containing audio files is inside the
CD player then ENTER displays the disc's
directory structure. The directory structure is
navigated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Audio files have the
symbol
and directories have the symbol
. Start audio file playback with ENTER.
G019807
Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,
track selection and menus
1. Select an empty position with buttons 1–
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.
> An empty position is marked on the display. The text Insert disc shows that a
new disc can be inserted. The
CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Audio source selection CD or
AUX*
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audio
system is in CD mode then playback is started
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is reinserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject button
.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc. The message Eject all is shown in the
display.
10
When the playback of a file is finished the playback of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if the
display is not wide enough to show the whole
audio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the navigation button are used to scroll between
CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used
to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or
the steering wheel keypad) can also be used
for this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each
CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.
Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrolled through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks on the current disc.
1
240
Applies to CD changer.
Different messages appear on the display
depending on which random function has been
selected.
• RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
• RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
• RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio
files in a directory on the current CD are
played.
Activating/deactivating (CD player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
The option All discs only applies to the music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CD
is selected.
Disc text
If a disc with audio files is being played:
If title information is stored on a music CD then
it can be shown on the display1.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Activating/deactivating
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
1. Start CD playback.
3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press
ENTER.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Activating/deactivating (CD changer)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.
CDs
Using low quality CD discs could result in poor
or non-existent sound.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).
Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc
labels. The heat in the CD player may cause
the label to come off, damaging the
CD player.
10
241
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – audio system
Overview
10
AUX menu
FM menu
2. News
2. TP
3. TP
3. PTY
4. Audio settings*
4. Radio text
5. Advanced radio settings
6. Audio settings*
AM menu
1. Audio settings*
CD menu
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5. Audio settings*
CD changer menu
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5. Audio settings*
242
1. AUX volume
1. News
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Overview - Phone system components
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Phone system components
10
1. Antenna
2. Steering wheel keypad
Emergency calls
Most phone system functions can be accessed
via the keypad. see page 245.
Making an emergency call
3. Microphone
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
The hands free microphone is integrated in the
roof console beside the rearview mirror.
SIM card
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made
without a SIM card as long as there is coverage
by a GSM operator.
1. Activate the phone.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Centre console control panel
5. Privacy handset
6. SIM card reader
General
244
•
•
Always put traffic safety first.
•
Switch off the phone system when refuelling the car.
•
•
Switch off the system near blasting work.
IDIS
The IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information
System) allows incoming phone calls and SMS
messages to be delayed so that the driver can
concentrate on driving. Incoming calls and
SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds
before they are connected. Missed calls are
shown on the display. IDIS can be deactivated
using menu function 5.5, see page 250.
If the driver needs to use the privacy handset, park the car in a safe place first.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out phone system
servicing.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020244
All phone functions (except call volume) can be
regulated via the control panel.
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are
available from various network operators. Contact your network operator if you experience
difficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM
cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards
work. Contact your network operator if you
need to change your SIM card.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Double SIM cards
Phone controls
Steering wheel keypad
Many network operators offer two SIM cards
for the same phone number. The extra SIM
card can be used in the car.
10
Inserting the SIM card
1. Switch off the phone and open the glovebox.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
Menus
Page 250 describes how to control phone
functions with the menu system.
G019809
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the
metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of
the SIM card should align with the bevel of
the SIM card holder.
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - Control the background volume from the radio, for example, during a
call
Number and letter buttons
G020243
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM
card reader, see illustration on page 244.
When the phone is active, the steering wheel
keypad is locked to phone functions. To control the audio system, the phone must be in
standby mode (standby).
ENTER – Works the same as on the control
panel
Traffic safety
MENU - Opens the main menu
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu
system cannot be accessed at speeds in
excess of 8 km/h.
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered characters
Navigation button – Scroll in menus and
character rows
EXIT – Works the same as on the control
panel
Call volume – Increase/decrease
Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the button reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
On/Off
Activating from standby mode
Call waiting
A handset appears in the display when the
phone system is active or in standby mode
(standby). If the remote control key is turned to
position 0 when the phone is in one of these
modes, the phone automatically resumes this
mode the next time the remote control key is
turned to position I or II.
±
A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates
that there is another incoming call. Answer?
appears on the display. The call can be refused
or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming
call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Activating the phone system
Phone system functions can only be used
when the phone is in active mode.
1. Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press
ENTER.
Deactivating the phone system
No calls can be received when the phone is
deactivated.
±
Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is
deactivated.
Making and receiving calls
If the privacy handset is raised when a phone
call is started, the sound will come from the
handsfree system. For information on switching between privacy handset and handsfree
during a call, see page 248.
To call
1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 248.
3. Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release
the handset by pressing it down.
Receiving a call
2. Scroll to Hold or Hold off and press
ENTER.
Dialling a third party
1. Put the call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party.
Switching between calls
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
±
A conference call consists of at least three parties that can talk to one another. Once a conference call has been initiated, no more parties
can be connected. All calls are ended when a
conference call is ended.
Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release
the handset by pressing it down.
Ending a call
Putting the phone in standby mode
Refusing a call
±
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see
page 250.
In standby mode, the audio system can be in
use while calls are received. However, it is not
possible to make calls when in standby mode.
The phone must first be in active mode before
it can be put in standby mode.
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call
2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.
Standby mode (standby)
246
Press PHONE.
±
±
Press PHONE.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press EXIT or hang up the handset.
Press EXIT.
Starting a conference call
1. Start two phone calls.
2. Press MENU or ENTER.
3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Volume
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
Key
Function
[email protected]*#&$£/%
10
Call volume
Call volume is regulated with
the steering wheel keypad.
If the privacy handset is used,
volume is regulated with a
wheel on the side of the handset.
Audio system volume
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered
during a phone call. Once the call is ended the
previous volume is resumed. If the volume is
regulated during the call, the new level is
retained once the call is ended. Sound can also
be automatically muted during a phone call,
see menu 5.4.3, on page 252. This function
only applies to the Volvo integrated phone system.
Entering text
Key
Function
Switch between upper and
lower case.
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
Handling numbers
abc2äåàæç
Calling the last number dialled
def3èé
The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers dialled.
ghi4ì
1. Press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
jkl5
Phone book
If the phone book contains a live caller's contact information then this is shown in the display. Contact information can be stored on the
SIM card and in the phone.
mno6ñöòØ
pqrs7ß
Storing contacts in the phone book
tuv8üù
1. Press MENU.
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character once for the first character on the button,
twice for the second, etc. See table.
2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a
row are to be entered using the same button, press * or wait a few seconds.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
wxyz9
3. Scroll to New number and press ENTER.
Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after
each other with the same
key.
4. Enter a name and press ENTER.
5. Enter a number and press ENTER.
6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone and press
ENTER.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
Searching for contacts in the phone book
6. Scroll to Delete and press ENTER.
Calling using speed dial
Use the down arrow of the navigation button
instead of MENU for direct access to the
Search menu.
Erase all contacts
±
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM
and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and
press ENTER.
If required, enter phone code. The factory-set
default code is 1234.
Speed dial
A keypad button (1–9) can be used as a speed
dial number for a contact in the phone book.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select numbers and press
ENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for
the speed dial number and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu
system.
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press
ENTER.
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Briefly press the required keypad button,
followed by ENTER.
NOTE
When the phone is switched on, it takes a
while before speed dialling is available.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial
must be activated in the Phonebook menu,
see page 251.
Calling from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.
> All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contacts
displayed can be reduced by entering
part of the contact's name.
3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
NOTE
Press ENTER to dial.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the keypad for about 2 seconds to reach the corresponding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call.
Some functions can only be used when a call
is on hold.
SMS - Short Message Service
IMEI number
Reading SMS
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
> The message text is shown in the display. Additional selections can be made
by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu and scroll to one of the following alternatives:
Writing and sending
1. Mute/Mute off – Mute mode.
1. Press MENU.
2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or
resume a call.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Handsfree/Handset - Use handsfree or
the privacy handset.
4. Enter text and press ENTER.
4. Phonebook – Show phone book.
5. Join – Conference calling (available if more
than three parties are connected)
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI number. This is a 15 digit serial number that is programmed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show
this number in the display. Write it down and
keep it in a safe place.
Specifications
3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
10
A
Output
2W
SIM card
Small
Memory entries
250A
SMS (Short Message Service)
Yes
Data/Fax
No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz)
Yes
The capacity of the SIM card's memory varies depending on
SIM card type.
6. Swap – Switch between two calls (available if up to three parties are connected).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
249
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
Phone menu
10
1.
Speed dial
4.6.3.
Not answered
Call register
2.4.1.
Active
4.6.4.
Not reachable
1.1.
Missed calls
2.4.2.
Select numbers
4.6.5.
Fax calls
1.2.
Received calls
2.5.
Erase SIM
4.6.6.
Data calls
1.3.
Dialled no.
2.6.
Erase phone
4.6.7.
Cancel all
1.4.
Erase list
2.7.
Memory status
1.5.
2.
250
2.4.
1.4.1.
All calls
1.4.2.
Missed calls
3.1.
Read
1.4.3.
Received calls
3.2.
Write
1.4.4.
Dialled no.
3.3.
Message settings
3.
5.
Tel. settings
5.1.
Messages
5.2.
Network
5.1.1.
Auto
5.1.2.
Manual select
SIM security
Call duration
3.3.1.
SMSC number
5.2.1.
On
1.5.1.
Last call
3.3.2.
Validity time
5.2.2.
Off
1.5.2.
Call count
3.3.3.
Message type
5.2.3.
Auto
1.5.3.
Total time
1.5.4.
Reset timers
4.
5.3.
Call options
Change code
4.1.
Send my no.
5.3.1.
PIN code
Phonebook
4.2.
Call waiting
5.3.2.
Phone code
2.1.
New number
4.3.
Automatic answer
2.2.
Search
4.4.
Auto redial
5.4.1.
Ring volume
2.3.
Copy all
4.5.
Voice mail number
5.4.2.
Ring signal
2.3.1.
SIM to phone
4.6.
Call divert
5.4.3.
Mute radio
2.3.2.
Phone to SIM
4.6.1.
All calls
5.4.4.
Msg. beep
4.6.2.
When engag.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5.4.
5.5.
Audio
IDIS
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
5.6
Factory settings
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.5.3.
Total time
3. Messages
1.5.4.
Reset timers
3.1. Read
2. Phone book
2.1. New number
Store names and phone numbers in the phone
book, see page 247.
2.2. Search
1.2. Received calls
Search for a name in the phone book.
List of received calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
2.3. Copy all
1.3. Dialled no.
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
From SIM to phone memory
1.4. Erase list
2.3.2.
From phone to SIM memory.
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and
1.3 as below.
2.4. Speed dial
All calls
A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
1.4.2.
Missed calls erased
2.5. Erase SIM
1.4.3.
Received calls erased
1.4.4.
Dialled calls erased
3.3.1.
SMSC number
3.3.2.
Validity time
3.3.3.
Message type
4.1. Send my no.
Erase the entire phone memory.
Displays or hides your phone number to/from
the person you call. Contact your network
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
Shows how many positions are occupied in the
SIM card and phone memory. The table shows
how many of the total number of positions are
occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
Call count
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the message centre to which messages are to be transferred as well as how long they are to be saved
at the message centre. Contact your network
operator for information on message settings.
Normally, these settings should not be altered.
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
1.5.2.
Write a message using the keypad. Choose
whether to save or send it.
4. Call options
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.
To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
Last call
3.2. Write
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
1.5. Call duration
1.5.1.
10
3.3. Message sett
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
2.3.1.
1.4.1.
Received text messages. Select whether to
erase, forward, change or save the entire message or parts of it.
4.2. Call waiting
Be alerted during a phone call that there is
another incoming call.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
4.3. Auto answer
10
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Auto redial
Automatically calls a previously engaged number.
5.1.2.
Manual select
5.2. SIM security
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the
phone should automatically give the PIN code.
5.2.1.
On
Stores voice mail number.
5.2.2.
Off
4.6. Diversion
5.2.3.
Auto
Choose when and what type of calls are to be
diverted to a specified phone number.
5.3. Edit codes
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6.1.
All calls
This setting only applies during the call in progress
Change PIN or phone code. Write the codes
down and keep them in a safe place.
5.3.1.
PIN code
5.3.2.
Phone code.
4.6.2.
When engag.
4.6.3.
Not answered
The factory-set phone code 1234 is used until
you change to your own code.
4.6.4.
Not reachable
5.4. Sounds
4.6.5.
Fax calls
5.4.1.
4.6.6.
Data calls
Adjust the ring tone volume.
4.6.7.
Cancel all
5.4.2.
Volume.
Ring signal.
There are seven different ring tones.
5. Phone settings
5.1. Network
Choose a network automatically or manually.
The selected network is shown in the display in
the phone's basic mode.
5.1.1.
252
5.4.3.
Mute radio. On/off
5.4.4.
Msg. beep
Auto
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5.5. IDIS
If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming
calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving
situation.
5.5. Factory sett.
Reset the system's factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
General
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control
panel in the centre console (3), see page 245.
Remember
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio system. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The microphone is
fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone
can always be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected.
The menus are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad. For general information on menus, see page 250.
Activating/deactivating
A short press on PHONE activates the handsfree function. The text PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol
shows that the handsfree function is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a connected phone.
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
10
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's
manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothTM name in the display. The handsfree function's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the
mobile phone as My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone keypad.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
253
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
To call
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see
the mobile phone's manual.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 256.
3. Select My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Car from the
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 255.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 255.
Manual disconnection takes place by deactivating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened1.
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the
changeover from handsfree is confirmed
from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Auto answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/
deactivate under Phone menu Phone
settings Call options Automatic
answer.
In-call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
• Microphone muted - audio system
microphone is muted.
• Transfer call to mobile - the call is transferred to the mobile phone.
1
254
Applies to Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
• Phone book – searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
Audio settings
Call volume
The call volume can be regulated when the
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
with VOLUME. In order to control audio system
volume during an ongoing call you have to
switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone menu
2
Phone settings
Mute radio.
More on registering and connecting
Sounds and volume
Ring volume
Go to Phone menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume and
/
on the navigation button.
adjust with
A maximum of five mobile phones can be registered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth Remove phone.
10
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected under Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals... Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal2, go to Phone menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals...
Use mobile phone signal.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the connected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2. Press PHONE and select one of the
phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu
system under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth
Connect phone or Change phone.
Not supported by all mobile phones.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
Phonebook
10
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text PHONE is shown at the top of the display
symbol is visible.
and that the
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection. Deactivate the function under Phone settings
Synchronise phone book. Searching for contacts is only performed in the connected
mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copying of the phone book then List is empty is
shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with
/
on the navigation button or with
/
on
256
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phonebook Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre console. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the table on page 247.
Voice recognition
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. One long press on EXIT clears all input
/
on the navigation button
characters.
scrolls between the characters.
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
Menu structure - Bluetooth
Voice mail number
1.
Missed calls
Voice mail number can be changed under
Phone settings Call options Voice mail
number. If there is no number stored then this
menu can be reached with one long press on
1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored
number.
2.
Received calls
3
Dialled calls
4.
Phonebook
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under Call register….
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled calls in reverse order.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5.
4.1.
Search
4.2.
Copy from phone
Bluetooth...
5.1.
Change phone
5.2.
Connect phone
5.3.
Disconnect phone
5.4.
Connect from mobile phone
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
6.
Phone settings
6.1.
Call options
6.1.1.
Auto reply
6.1.2.
Voice mail number
6.2.
Sounds and volume
6.3.
Synchronise phone book
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
258
260
263
266
268
272
275
280
281
283
G000000
Type designation...................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Catalytic converter................................................................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
SPECIFICATIONS
11
11 Specifications
Type designation
G032083
11
260
11 Specifications
Type designation
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
11
Label for parking heater.
Engine type designation, component and
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number:
manual gearbox
,
automatic gearbox
VIN number (type and model year designation plus chassis number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
``
261
11 Specifications
Type designation
NOTE
11
262
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
11
Dimensions
mm
A
Wheelbase
2640
B
Length
4522
C
Load length, floor, folded
seat
1766
D
Load length, floor
989
E
Load height
685
F
Height
1457
G
Front track
1535
Dimensions
mm
Weights
H
Rear track
1531
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
I
Load width, floor
1002
J
Width
1770
K
Width including door mirrors
2022
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) influences the payload and is not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
``
263
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
NOTE
11
WARNING
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
For decal location, see page 260.
Towing capacity and towball load
264
Engine
Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg)
Maximum towball load (kg)
1.6
1200
50
1.6D
1300
75
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Engine
Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg)
Maximum towball load (kg)
1.8
1300
75
1.8F
1300
2.0
1350
others
1500
11
Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg)
Maximum towball load (kg)
700
50
265
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Overview
Engine
Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Compression ratio
1.6
B4164S3
74/6000
100/6000
150/4000
4
79
81.4
1,596
11.0:1
1.8
B4184S11
92/6000
125/6000
165/4000
4
83
83.1
1,798
10.8:1
1.8F
B4184S8
92/6000
125/6000
165/4000
4
83
83.1
1,798
10.8:1
2.0
B4204S3
107/6000
145/6000
185/4500
4
87,5
83.1
1,999
10.8:1
2.4
B5244S5
103/5000
140/5000
220/4000
5
83
90.0
2,435
10.3:1
2.4i
B5244S4
125/6000
170/6000
230/4400
5
83
90.0
2,435
10.3:1
T5
B5254T7
169/5000
230/5000
320/1500 –
5000
5
83
93.2
2.521
9.0:1
1.6D
D4164T
80/4000
109/4000
240/1750
4
75
88.3
1,560
18.3:1
2.0D
D4204T
100/4000
136/4000
320/2000
4
85
88.0
1,997
18.5:1
D5
D5244T8
132/4000
180/4000
350/1750 –
3250
5
81
93.2
2,401
17.3:1
D5
D5244T13
132/4000
180/4000
400/2000 –
2750
5
81
93.2
2,401
17.3:1
D5
D5244T9A
120/4000
163/4000
340/1750 –
3000
5
81
93.2
2,401
17.3:1
11
A
266
Belgium
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine type designation, component and serial
number can be read on the engine, see
page 260.
11
267
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
11
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter than +40 °C.
This can produce abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Also check the oil level more often if the car is
often driven short distances (less than 10 km)
when temperatures are low (below +5 °C).
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
268
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Viscosity chart
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil (see the engine compartment
decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
G020236
Adverse driving conditions
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Oil decal
Engine oil grade
Engine variant
Volume between
VolumeA
MIN-MAX (litres)
(litres)
B5244S5
1.3
5.8
2.4iB
B5244S4
1.3
5.8
T5B
B5254T7
1.3
5.8
1.6D
D4164T
1.0
3.8
11
G032080
2.4B
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 204.
Oil grade: ACEA A3/B3/B4
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
When driving under adverse conditions, use
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
A
B
Including filter change
Does not apply to Europe, for Europe see oil ACEA A5/B5
``
269
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
Engine variant
G032079
11
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 204.
Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
When driving under adverse conditions, use
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
A
270
Including filter change
Volume between
VolumeA
MIN-MAX (litres)
(litres)
1.6
B4164S3
0.75
4.0
1.8
B4184S11
0.75
4.3
1.8F
B4184S8
0.75
4.3
2.0
B4204S3
0.75
4.3
D4204T
1.8
5.0
2.0D
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
G032078
Engine variant
Volume between
VolumeA
MIN-MAX (litres)
(litres)
2.4
B5244S5B
1.3
5.5
2.4i
B5244S4 B
1.3
5.5
T5
B5254T7 B
1.3
5.5
D5
D5244T8
1.5
6.0
11
D5244T9
(Only Belgium)
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 204.
D5244T13
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
A
B
Including filter change
Europe only, for other markets see oil ACEA A3/B3/B4
271
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Overview
IMPORTANT
11
The recommended transmission fluid must
be used to prevent damage to the gearbox.
Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.
If the transmission is topped up with a different fluid, contact a workshop nearby for
servicing. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Gearbox oil
272
Engine
Gearbox
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
1.6 petrol
Manual 5-speed, IB5
2.1
BOT 130 M
1.8 petrol
Manual 5-speed, MTX75
1.8
BOT 350M3
1.8F Flexifuel
Manual 5-speed, MTX75
1.8
BOT 350M3
2.0 petrol
Manual 5-speed, MTX75
1:8
BOT 350M3
2.0 petrol
Automatic, MPS6
5.5
BOT 341
2.4 petrol
Automatic, AW55-51
7.7
JWS 3309
2.4i petrol
Manual 5-speed, M56
2.1
BOT 350M3
2.4i petrol
Automatic, AW55-51
7.7
JWS 3309
T5 petrol
Manual 6-speed, M66
1.9
BOT 350M3
T5 petrol
Automatic, AW55-51
7.7
JWS 3309
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Engine
Gearbox
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
1.6D diesel
Manual 5-speed, MTX75
1.8
BOT 350M3
2.0D diesel
Manual 6-speed, MMT6
1.7
BOT 350M3
2.0D diesel
Automatic, MPS6
5.5
BOT 341
D5 diesel
Manual 6-speed, M66
1.9
BOT 350M3
D5 diesel
Automatic, AW55-51
7.7
JWS 3309
11
Fluids
Fluid
System
Volume (litres)
Coolant
1.6 petrol
6.2
1.8, 1.8F and 2.0 petrol
7.5
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed
with waterA, see packaging. The thermostat starts opening at:
5-cyl. manual gearbox
9.5
petrol engine (1.6) 82 °C
5-cyl. automatic gearbox
10.0
petrol engines 90 °C,
1.6D diesel
7.2
diesel engines 82 °C
2.0D diesel
9.5
Refrigerant
Air conditioning
B
Recommended oil grade
diesel engine (1.6D) 83 °C
R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid
Brake system
Power steering fluid
Power steering
0.6
1.0 – 1.2
DOT 4+
WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product
with same specifications.
``
273
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
274
A
B
Fluid
System
Volume (litres)
Washer fluid
4-cyl. Petrol/Diesel
4.0
5-cyl. Petrol/Diesel
6.5
Recommended oil grade
Use a washer antifreeze recommended
by Volvo, mixed with water for temperatures below freezing.
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
11 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions, fuel consumption and tank volume
Engine
Gearbox
Emissions of carbon dioxide CO2
(g/km)
Consumption
(litre/100 km)
Tank volume (litres)
1.6
B4164S3
Manual 5 speed (IB5)
169
7.1
approx. 53
1.8
B4184S11
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)
174
7.3
approx. 53
1.8FA
B4184S8
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)
177
7.4
approx. 53
2.0
B4204S3
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)
176
7.4
approx. 53
2.4
B5244S5
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
217
9.1
approx. 62
2.4i
B5244S4
Manual 5 speed (M56H)
203
8.5
approx. 62
2.4i
B5244S4
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
217
9.1
approx. 62
T5
B5254T7
Manual 6 speed (M66)
203
8.7
approx. 62
T5
B5254T7
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
211
9.0
approx. 62
T5 AWD
B5254T7
Manual 6 speed (M66) AWD
224
9.6
approx. 57
T5 AWD
B5254T7
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
AWD
229
9.8
approx. 57
1.6D
D4164T
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)
119
4.5
approx. 52
2.0D
D4204T
Manual select
153
5.7
approx. 52
(EURO4)
6-speed (MMT6)
D4204T
Manual 5 speed (M56)
148
5.6
approx. 52
2.0D
11
``
275
11 Specifications
Fuel
Engine
11
Gearbox
Emissions of carbon dioxide CO2
(g/km)
Consumption
(litre/100 km)
Tank volume (litres)
Automatic gearbox (MPS6)
159
6.0
approx. 52
2.0D
D4204T
D5
D5244T13
Manual 6 speed (M66)
166
6.3
approx. 60
D5
D5244T8
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
184
7.0
approx. 60
D5244T9
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)
184
7.0
approx. 60
D5
(Only Belgium)
A
Flexifuel can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes 30-40% more E85 which has a lower energy
content. The precise difference depends on driving style, ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification amongst other things.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Official fuel consumption figures are based on
a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU
Directive 80/1268/EEC comb. and 92/21/EEC.
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. The manner in which the car
is driven, and other non-technical factors can
also affect fuel consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
276
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer
or driving at high altitudes in combination
with fuel grade are factors that could affect
the car's performance.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact
lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with
plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well
as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause
permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
11 Specifications
Fuel
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
IMPORTANT
•
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
•
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
Diesel
Bioethanol E85
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,
95 and 98 RON.
•
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder
engines and should only be used in exceptional cases with other engines.
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive
gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it
is refuelled with ethanol.
Do not modify the fuel system or its components, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specially designed for use
with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the
inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct
alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,
see page 139.
11
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,
such as excessively high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
``
277
11 Specifications
Fuel
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
11
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel
oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements
in accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
3. Wait for about 1 minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control
key to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Empty tank
After stalling due to fuel shortage the fuel system needs a short time to perform a check.
Proceed as follows before the engine is
started:
1. Fill at least 5 litres of diesel in the fuel tank.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and turn to key position II (see
page 137).
1
278
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission
control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automatically at an interval of approximately 300–900
km depending on driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes between 10 - 20 minutes.
It may take a little longer at a low average
speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly
during regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated
automatically to increase the load on the
engine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become
approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow
information symbol on the instrument panel
illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER
FULL - SEE MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.
11 Specifications
Fuel
When regeneration is complete the message is
cleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start
the engine and there is a risk that the filter
will have to be replaced.
11
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
11 Specifications
Catalytic converter
General
11
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,
rhodium and palladium. These metals act as
catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate
a chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic
converter, these adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of the
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon
monoxide and nitrous oxides).
280
11 Specifications
Electrical system
General
12 V system with a voltage-regulated alternator. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors.
If the battery is changed, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve
capacity as the original (see the decal on the
battery).
11
Battery
Engine
Cold start capacity
Reserve capacity,
(CCA, Cold Cranking Amperes), A
minutes
590
100
60
600 A
120
70
700 B
135
80
Output (W)
Type
Dipped beam
55
H7
Main beam (specifically for halogen)
55
H9
Extra main beam (specifically for Dual Xenon and ABL, Active Bending Lights)
55
H7
Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp
21
P21W
4 and 5-cyl. petrol
4 and 5-cyl. diesel
A
B
Voltage, V
12
12
Capacity, Ah
Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.
Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting
``
281
11 Specifications
Electrical system
Lighting
11
Output (W)
Type
Front direction indicators (specifically for Dual Xenon and halogen), rear direction indicators
21
PY21W
Front direction indicators (specifically for ABL, Active Bending Lights)
24
PY24W
Rear position/parking and side marker lamps (upper socket)
5
P21/5W
Rear position/parking lamps (lower socket)
5
R5W
Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate lighting
5
C5W
1.2
Tubular lamp
Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps
5
W5W
Fog lamps
35
H8
Glovebox lighting
3
Tubular lamp
Vanity mirror*
282
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system
Country and
region
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control key
system conforms to
the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of
directive 1999/5/EC.
Certification of the Keyless Drive
system
Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies
that this equipment type 5WK4 8952,
5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the
essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.
11
Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany RLPD1-03-0151
BR
TW
ETC093LPD0155
283
12 Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
electronic climate control..................... 91
manual climate control................... 86, 87
Air vents..................................................... 85
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 144
towing and recovery........................... 159
trailer................................................... 162
Adaptation............................................... 140
Additional heater (Diesel)........................... 96
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 148
Average fuel consumption......................... 59
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 171
Dual Xenon headlamps....................... 171
halogen headlamp.............................. 171
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 122
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 148
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 56
Active Dual Xenon lights............................ 56
Active headlamps...................................... 56
AF – automatic frequency update........... 237
Airbag........................................................
activating/deactivating, PACOS...........
deactivating/activating.........................
driver's and front passenger side.........
20
23
23
21
Air conditioning.......................................... 86
ECC...................................................... 89
general.................................................. 84
Air distribution............................................ 92
ECC...................................................... 90
Air distribution, A/C................................... 87
284
Automatic car washes............................. 192
Alarm........................................................
alarm indicator....................................
arming.................................................
automatic alarm activation.................
deactivating a triggered alarm............
disarming............................................
RDS traffic warning.............................
reduced alarm level............................
testing the alarm system....................
ABS fault............................................ 49, 149
12
Air quality system, ECC............................. 90
128
128
128
129
129
128
235
129
130
Approach light, duration............................ 73
setting................................................... 78
Audio, see also Sound............................. 230
Audio volume
phone.......................................... 247, 255
phone/media player............................ 255
ring signal, phone............................... 255
Auto
climate control settings........................ 89
AUTO
storing stations................................... 234
Auto climate............................................... 89
Automatic locking.................................... 125
Automatic relocking................................. 124
Autostart.................................................. 137
Auto volume control................................ 233
Auxiliary heater.......................................... 96
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering............................. 100
Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 108
Bag holder............................................... 113
Bass speaker........................................... 231
Battery............................................. 211, 281
changing the battery in the remote control key................................................ 123
maintenance............................... 201, 211
12 Alphabetical Index
135
281
161
211
Bulb holder
removal............................................... 216
Catalytic converter................................... 280
recovery.............................................. 159
Bulbs
changing............................................. 213
CD discs
storage compartment......................... 106
Bioethanol E85........................................ 275
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 213, 281
CD functions............................................ 239
overload..............................................
specifications......................................
start assistance...................................
symbols on the battery.......................
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 155
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 74, 155
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 253
mute microphone............................... 254
transfer call to mobile......................... 254
Bonnet, opening...................................... 202
Booster cushion
folding up.............................................. 37
lowering................................................ 38
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 37
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 208
Brake light.................................................. 57
Brakes
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 149
brake light............................................. 57
emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 150
emergency brake lights........................ 57
handbrake............................................. 68
Brake system........................................... 149
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 207
C
Checks
fluids and oils...................................... 205
Calls
functions during a call................ 246, 249
incoming............................................. 254
operation..................................... 246, 254
volume in phone................................. 247
Children..................................................... 32
child safety locks................................ 127
child seats and side airbags................. 25
location in the car................................. 32
location in the car, table....................... 33
safety.................................................... 32
Car care................................................... 192
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 194
Cargo area............................................... 110
cargo cover................................. 111, 112
lighting................................................ 103
loading................................................ 170
safety grille.......................................... 110
safety net.................................... 110, 112
Cargo cover..................................... 111, 112
Car settings............................................... 78
Car upholstery......................................... 194
Car wash.................................................. 192
12
Child safety locks.................................... 127
Child seat................................................... 32
Child seats................................................. 32
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 38
Cigarette lighter socket
front seat............................................... 54
Cleaning
automatic car washes.........................
car wash.............................................
rims.....................................................
seatbelts.............................................
upholstery...........................................
192
192
192
194
194
285
12 Alphabetical Index
Climate control
general.................................................. 84
personal preferences............................ 77
12
Driving in water........................................ 134
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 263
towing capacity.................................. 263
Climate control settings
auto....................................................... 89
Deadlocks................................................ 125
deactivation........................................ 125
temporary deactivation....................... 125
Clock, adjustment...................................... 77
Defroster.................................................... 87
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 208
Diesel....................................................... 277
DSTC, see also Stability system
symbol.................................................. 49
Coat hanger............................................. 105
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 49
During a call, functions............................ 249
Cold start................................................. 146
automatic gearbox.............................. 146
Diesel particle filter.................................. 278
Collision
crash mode........................................... 31
inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 27
Direction indicators.................................... 58
E
Disc text................................................... 240
ECC, electronic climate control................. 85
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 146
Economical driving.................................. 134
Display, messages..................................... 52
ECO pressure.......................................... 178
table.................................................... 178
Colour code, paint................................... 195
Combined instrument panel...................... 47
Compass................................................... 71
calibration............................................. 71
setting the zone.................................... 71
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 205
Display lighting.......................................... 56
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 228, 232
Door mirrors............................................... 73
Condensation in headlamps.................... 192
Driver's door control panel.................. 46, 69
Coolant.................................................... 207
Driving
cooling system....................................
economical.........................................
in water...............................................
slippery driving conditions..................
with trailer...........................................
Cooling system........................................ 134
Crash, see Collision................................... 31
Cruise control............................................ 64
286
D
134
134
134
134
162
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 151
Electrical socket
cargo area........................................... 113
centre console...................................... 54
rear seat................................................ 54
Electrical system...................................... 281
Emergency calls...................................... 244
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 181
Emergency puncture repair..................... 185
12 Alphabetical Index
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 49
Engine block heater................................. 139
fuel-driven............................................. 93
Engine compartment............................... 202
coolant................................................ 207
power steering fluid............................ 208
F
Fan
A/C........................................................ 86
ECC...................................................... 89
Fast-wind................................................. 240
First aid equipment.................................. 182
Engine oil......................................... 205, 268
adverse driving conditions.................. 268
capacities........................................... 268
filter..................................................... 204
oil grade.............................................. 268
oil pressure........................................... 50
Flexifuel.................................................... 139
adaptation........................................... 140
Engine specifications............................... 266
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compartment......................................................... 204
Entry, keyless............................................. 78
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 13
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 237
Equalizer.................................................. 232
Error messages in BLIS........................... 157
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 263
fuel consumption, display..................... 59
fuel economy...................................... 178
level indicator........................................ 49
parking heater....................................... 93
refuelling............................................. 136
Floor mats................................................ 100
Fuses.......................................................
box in the engine compartment..........
changing.............................................
general................................................
relay/fuse box in the passenger compartment.............................................
219
220
219
219
12
223
Fluids, capacities..................................... 272
Fluids and oils.................................. 204, 272
G
Fluids and oils general............................. 204
Gearbox
manual................................................ 142
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 56
Gear selector assistance (GSI - Gear shift
indicator).................................................. 142
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 56
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 145
Frequency update, automatic.................. 237
Geartronic................................................ 144
Front seats, heated.................................... 87
General information on fuel..................... 275
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Glovebox................................................. 105
locking................................................ 118
Fuel
CO2 emissions.................................... 275
consumption....................................... 275
Gross vehicle weight............................... 263
GSI - Gear shift indicator......................... 142
287
12 Alphabetical Index
H
Infotainment system
menus................................................. 228
Key blade......................................... 117, 121
active locks......................................... 119
Handbrake................................................. 68
Instrument lighting..................................... 56
Hazard warning flashers............................ 67
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 42
right-hand drive.................................... 44
Keyless drive............................ 120, 141, 283
starting the car.................................... 141
Headlamps................................................. 55
Head restraint.......................................... 108
12
Keyless entry............................................. 78
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 120
Heating
front seats....................................... 87, 91
rearview and door mirrors.............. 87, 91
rear window.................................... 87, 91
Integrated booster cushion........................ 37
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 64, 66, 245
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 102
Key positions........................................... 137
Interior rearview mirror............................... 71
automatic dimming............................... 71
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 144
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 61
Intermittent wiping..................................... 61
HomeLinkŸ EU.......................................... 79
iPodŸ, connection................................... 230
Home safe lighting............................... 58, 73
setting................................................... 78
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 38
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 280
I
J
Jack......................................................... 181
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information System........................................................... 244
Ignition keys............................................. 138
IMEI number............................................ 249
Immobiliser...................................... 116, 138
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 27
Information display.................................... 52
288
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 263
Key
keyless lock and ignition system........ 120
remote control key.............................. 116
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 194
Lighting
Active Dual Xenon lights....................... 56
approach light, duration....................... 73
automatic lighting............................... 103
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 55
bulbs, specifications........................... 281
cargo area........................................... 103
dipped beam........................................ 55
display lighting...................................... 56
front fog lamps..................................... 56
12 Alphabetical Index
headlamp levelling................................ 55
home safe lighting.......................... 58, 73
in passenger compartment................. 102
lighting panel, passenger compartment...................................................... 55
main/dipped beam......................... 55, 58
position/parking lamps......................... 55
reading lamps..................................... 102
rear fog lamp........................................ 56
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 112
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 144
Locking.................................................... 121
unlocking............................................ 124
Memory function in seats........................ 101
Locking/unlocking................................... 124
inside.................................................. 124
outside................................................ 124
Menus
audio system...................................... 228
Locks
locking................................................ 124
Menu structure.......................................... 77
media player....................................... 242
phone, menu options.......................... 251
phone, overview................................. 250
213
218
217
214
215
216
213
214
217
215
215
217
215
218
Lubricants................................................ 272
Messages in BLIS.................................... 157
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 272
Messages in the information display......... 52
Loading
general................................................ 170
load capacity...................................... 170
load retaining eyelets.......................... 112
Making calls..................................... 246, 254
Lighting, bulb replacement......................
cargo area...........................................
courtesy lighting.................................
dipped beam......................................
direction indicators.............................
fog lamp..............................................
front....................................................
main beam halogen............................
number plate lighting..........................
parking lamps.....................................
position lamps....................................
rear lamp.............................................
side marker lamps..............................
vanity mirror........................................
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 55
Main beam
flashing................................................. 58
Main beam "flash"..................................... 58
Maintenance............................................ 201
rustproofing........................................ 196
self-maintenance................................ 201
Manual gearbox....................................... 142
GSI - Gear shift indicator.................... 142
towing and recovery........................... 159
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge.............................................
outside temperature gauge..................
speedometer.........................................
tachometer...........................................
trip meter..............................................
12
47
47
47
47
47
Misting
attending to the windows..................... 84
condensation in headlamps............... 192
rear window.......................................... 87
removing with defroster function.... 87, 90
timer function.................................. 87, 90
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 255
handsfree............................................ 253
register phone..................................... 253
289
12 Alphabetical Index
N
News........................................................ 236
parking on a hill.................................... 93
symbols and display messages............ 94
time setting........................................... 95
Particle filter............................................. 278
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 205, 268
One-key dial............................................. 248
12
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 161
P
PACOS....................................................... 23
PACOS, switch.......................................... 23
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 195
damage and touch-up........................ 195
Parking assistance................................... 153
parking assistance sensors................ 154
Parking brake....................................... 50, 68
Parking heater
battery and fuel..................................... 93
general.................................................. 93
290
Passenger compartment filter................... 84
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven............................................. 93
Personal preferences.................................
approach light, duration.......................
auto blower adjust................................
automatic locking.................................
doors unlock.........................................
home safe lighting................................
keyless entry.........................................
lock confirm. light.................................
recirculation timer.................................
unlock confirm. light.............................
77
78
77
78
78
78
78
78
77
78
Petrol grade............................................. 277
Phone
calling from the phone book...............
connect...............................................
controls...............................................
entering text........................................
handsfree............................................
incoming calls.....................................
making calls........................................
on/off..................................................
248
255
245
247
253
254
254
246
one-key dial........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
register phone.....................................
standby, standby mode......................
traffic safety........................................
248
256
256
254
253
246
245
Phone book
handling numbers............................... 247
Phone system.......................................... 244
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 76
Polishing.................................................. 193
Power seat............................................... 101
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 208
Power sunroof........................................... 75
Power windows.........................................
blocking................................................
passenger seat.....................................
rear seat................................................
69
70
70
70
Programme type...................................... 237
PTY – Programme type........................... 236
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 181, 183
Putting calls on hold................................ 246
12 Alphabetical Index
R
Radio
EON....................................................
frequency update................................
news...................................................
programme types...............................
radio settings......................................
radio stations......................................
REG....................................................
Reduced guard
settings................................................. 78
Refrigerant................................................. 84
237
237
236
235
234
234
237
Refuelling
fuel cap............................................... 136
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 136
refuelling............................................. 136
Refusing a call......................................... 246
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 237
Radio text................................................ 237
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 219
Rain sensor................................................ 62
Remote control........................................ 116
programmable...................................... 79
replacing the battery........................... 123
Random, CD and audio files.................... 240
RDS functions.......................................... 235
resetting.............................................. 238
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 102
Rearview and door mirrors
automatic retracting/extending...... 73, 78
compass............................................... 71
door...................................................... 73
electrically retractable........................... 73
interior................................................... 71
Recirculation
A/C........................................................ 86
ECC...................................................... 90
Remote control key.................................
battery replacement............................
detachable key blade.........................
functions.............................................
138
123
117
116
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 283
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 73
Reverse gear inhibitor
five-speed........................................... 142
six-speed, petrol................................. 142
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 192
Rustproofing............................................ 196
S
Safety
safety systems, table............................ 30
Safety grille.............................................. 110
Safety net......................................... 110, 112
Scan
CD and audio files.............................. 240
radio stations...................................... 235
12
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats
head restraints, rear............................
lowering the front backrest.................
lowering the rear backrest..................
manual setting....................................
power seat..........................................
108
100
108
100
101
Service programme................................. 200
Side airbags............................................... 25
Side airbag SIPS........................................ 25
291
12 Alphabetical Index
SIM card.................................................. 244
SIPS bags.................................................. 25
SMS......................................................... 249
read..................................................... 249
write.................................................... 249
Soot filter........................................... 52, 278
Soot filter full............................................ 278
12
Sound
audio settings............................. 230, 231
audio source....................................... 230
volume................................................ 230
Spare wheel............................................. 181
temporary spare......................... 176, 181
Spin control............................................. 151
SRS Airbag................................................ 20
SRS system............................................... 20
general.................................................. 20
Stability and traction control system....... 151
Stains....................................................... 194
Standby, phone....................................... 246
Start assistance....................................... 161
Starting the engine.................................. 137
keyless drive............................... 120, 141
Steering lock............................................ 137
292
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 64
keypad.................................... 64, 66, 245
steering wheel adjustment.................... 67
Stone chips and scratches...................... 195
T
Tailgate
driving with open tailgate................... 134
locking/unlocking........................ 116, 124
Storage compartment.............................. 104
CD discs............................................. 106
Tank volume............................................ 275
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment......................................................... 104
Temperature
actual temperature............................... 85
passenger compartment, electronic climate control.......................................... 91
passenger compartment, manual climate control.......................................... 88
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 234
Subwoofer............................................... 231
Sunroof...................................................... 75
opening and closing....................... 75, 76
pinch protection.................................... 76
sunscreen............................................. 76
ventilation position................................ 75
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 76
Surround.......................................... 228, 232
Symbols................................................... 152
indicator symbols........................... 49, 50
warning symbols................................... 48
Symbols and display messages
parking heater....................................... 94
Technical data, engine............................. 266
Testing the alarm system......................... 130
Timer
A/C........................................................ 87
ECC...................................................... 90
Tools........................................................ 181
Total airing function................................. 125
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 164
Towing..................................................... 159
towing eye.......................................... 160
Towing capacity....................................... 263
Towing equipment................................... 164
installation........................................... 166
12 Alphabetical Index
removing............................................. 168
specifications...................................... 165
Towing eye.............................................. 160
TP – Traffic information............................ 236
Traffic information.................................... 236
Trailer....................................................... 162
cable................................................... 164
Trip computer............................................ 59
U
Unlocking......................................... 121, 124
settings................................................. 78
USB, connection...................................... 230
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 74
V
Tuning Radio............................................ 234
Ventilation.................................................. 85
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 283
Vibration damper..................................... 164
Type designation..................................... 260
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 177
driving characteristics......................... 174
general................................................ 174
maintenance....................................... 174
pressure...................................... 178, 179
puncture repair................................... 185
specifications...................................... 174
speed ratings...................................... 174
tread wear indicators.......................... 175
winter tyres......................................... 177
Washers
headlamps............................................ 61
rear window.......................................... 62
washer fluid, filling.............................. 206
windscreen........................................... 61
Volume
audio system...................................... 230
auto volume control............................ 233
media player....................................... 230
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 151
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 19
Warning triangle....................................... 181
Washer fluid, filling................................... 206
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 193
Waxing..................................................... 193
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 263
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
removal...............................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
12
183
184
183
176
175
181
Whiplash injury.......................................... 28
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 28
whiplash injury...................................... 28
Windscreen wipers.................................... 61
rain sensor............................................ 62
Winter tyres.............................................. 177
Wiper
rear window.......................................... 62
293
12 Alphabetical Index
Wiper blades............................................
cleaning..............................................
replacing, rear window.......................
replacing, windscreen.........................
12
294
209
209
209
209
Notes
295
Notes
296
VOLVO V50
Owners Manual
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%-*':c\a^h]!6I%.'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%%.!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%.Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement